JP2016096983A - Game system and management device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system and a management device capable of recognizing a correlation between conversion of a first possession value corresponding to one lending rate to a second possession value corresponding to another lending rate and a game machine where a game is performed after the conversion so as to use it for the business operation and the like in a game hall.SOLUTION: A management device manages, as history of conversion, a unit ID of a ball lending unit that received a member card after the conversion, and totalizes and outputs the kinds (model name, type, rate) of a game machine corresponding to the ball lending unit so as to use them for the business operation and the like in a game hall.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  In the present invention, the number of game media obtained by a player by a game on a gaming machine and counted by the counting means of a gaming device provided corresponding to the gaming machine can be used for gaming on the gaming machine. The present invention relates to a game system and a management device that include, as possession values owned by a player, possession value management means for managing each lending rate when the possession value is lent.

  Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, in the management device, the number of balls is managed by an account for each loan rate, and in the unit, when paying out using balls of other loan rates other than the loan rate of the unit A gaming system is known that converts the number of balls of the other loan rate managed to the number of balls of the loan rate of the unit (so-called entry).

JP 2011-083502 A

  However, in the gaming system of Patent Document 1, it is impossible to grasp the relationship between the conversion and a gaming machine that plays a game after the conversion.

  The present invention has been made under such a background, and its purpose is to convert a first property value corresponding to one loan rate into a second property value corresponding to another loan rate. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming system and a management device that can grasp the relevance with a gaming machine that plays a game after the conversion, and that can be utilized for business in a game hall.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention and the drawings to be described later are appended in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to the appended description.

First, the invention according to means 1
Count of gaming devices that are obtained by a player in a gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and provided corresponding to the gaming machine. The number of game media counted by the means (counting / dispensing unit 380) can be used for a game on a gaming machine, and the possession value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) is owned by the player. Ownership value management means (for example, a storage table of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120, a storage DB of the member management device 162, a storage DB of the hall computer) , Membership card management data and visitor card management data of the money management computer 8),
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118, the CPU of the member management device 162, the CPU of the hall computer, the CPU of the possession management computer 8),
A gaming system (a gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment, a fourth gaming system 1B according to the fourth embodiment),
A post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit (membership management device 162, hall computer, or conversion history DB of the possession management computer that aggregates the types of gaming machines that have played a game after conversion by the conversion unit in an identifiable manner. "Unit ID", CPU)
Conversion that outputs the type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion (as a total vote for each type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion shown in FIG. 15), which is specified based on the counting result by the converted gaming machine counting means A gaming system, further comprising a post-game machine output means (a member management device 162, a hall computer, or a display or printer of a ball management computer).
According to this, since the types of gaming machines that have played a game after the conversion of the ownership value are aggregated and output, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the conversion of the ownership value and the gaming machine that has played a game after the conversion Can be used for business at amusement halls.

The invention according to means 2
A gaming system according to means 1, comprising:
The conversion means performs the conversion according to a conversion operation (an operation of a conversion execution button displayed on the display 124, a conversion operation from a remote controller) for a gaming device provided corresponding to the gaming machine,
Conversion receiving gaming machine totaling means for totalizing the type of gaming machine corresponding to the gaming apparatus that has received the conversion operation (“converted” in the conversion history DB of the member management device 162, hall computer, or possession management computer) "Unit ID", CPU)
The type of gaming machine corresponding to the gaming device that has received the conversion operation, identified based on the counting result by the conversion receiving gaming machine counting means (as the total vote for each gaming machine type that has received the conversion shown in FIG. 16) A gaming system characterized by further comprising a conversion receiving gaming machine output means (member management device 162, hall computer, or display of a ball management computer, printer).
According to this, since the types of gaming machines corresponding to the gaming device that has received the conversion operation are aggregated and output, the conversion of possession value and the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming device that has received the conversion operation Can be grasped, and can be utilized for sales at amusement halls.

The invention according to means 3 is
A gaming system according to means 1 or 2, wherein
Conversion history totaling means (member management device 162, conversion history DB, CPU of possession management computer) for totalizing the history of conversions executed by the conversion means in an identifiable manner,
Conversion history output means (member management device 162, hall computer, or display of a possession management computer, printer) for outputting a conversion history specified based on the result of counting by the conversion history counting means. This is a gaming system that is characterized.
According to this, since the history of conversion of ownership value is aggregated and output, it can be confirmed whether or not the conversion has been performed, and the history of conversion can be utilized for sales at a game hall or the like.

The invention according to means 4 is
Count of gaming devices that are obtained by a player in a gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and provided corresponding to the gaming machine. The number of game media counted by the means (counting / dispensing unit 380) can be used for a game on a gaming machine, and the possession value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) is owned by the player. Ownership value management means (for example, a storage table of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120, a storage DB of the member management device 162, a storage DB of the hall computer) , Membership card management data and visitor card management data of the money management computer 8),
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118, the CPU of the member management device 162, the CPU of the hall computer, the CPU of the holding ball management computer 8), and corresponds to a gaming machine A management device (member management device 162, hall computer, possession management computer 8) that can communicate with the gaming device (ball lending unit 120) provided as
A post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit (conversion history DB, CPU of the member management device 162, hall computer, or possession management computer) for totalizing the type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion by the conversion unit;
Conversion that outputs the type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion (as a total vote for each type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion shown in FIG. 15), which is specified based on the counting result by the converted gaming machine counting means And a post-game machine output means (member management device 162, hall computer, display of a ball management computer, printer).
According to this, since the types of gaming machines that have played a game after the conversion of the ownership value are aggregated and output, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the conversion of the ownership value and the gaming machine that has played a game after the conversion Can be used for business at amusement halls.

The invention according to means 5 is
Count of gaming devices that are obtained by a player in a gaming machine (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and provided corresponding to the gaming machine. The number of game media counted by the means (counting / dispensing unit 380) can be used for a game on a gaming machine, and the possession value (the number of stored balls, the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) is owned by the player. Ownership value management means (for example, a storage table of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120, a storage DB of the member management device 162, a storage DB of the hall computer) , Membership card management data and visitor card management data of the money management computer 8),
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Management device (member) having a conversion means (a CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118) and capable of communicating with a gaming device (ball lending unit 120) provided corresponding to the gaming machine A management device 162, a hall computer, a coin management computer 8),
A post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit (conversion history DB, CPU of the member management device 162, hall computer, or possession management computer) for totalizing the type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion by the conversion unit;
Conversion that outputs the type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion (as a total vote for each type of gaming machine that has played a game after conversion shown in FIG. 15), which is specified based on the counting result by the converted gaming machine counting means And a post-game machine output means (member management device 162, hall computer, display of a ball management computer, printer).
According to this, since the types of gaming machines that have played a game after the conversion of the ownership value are aggregated and output, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the conversion of the ownership value and the gaming machine that has played a game after the conversion Can be used for business at amusement halls.

The invention according to means 6 is
A gaming system according to means 3, wherein
The property value management means manages the property value in association with identification information (member ID) of a recording medium (member card) owned by the player,
The conversion history output means can specify, as the conversion history, a conversion history of ownership value associated with the identification information of the recording medium for each recording medium (for each card shown in FIG. 14A). It is a game system characterized by being output (as a total vote).
According to this, since the conversion history for each recording medium can be confirmed, the conversion history can be utilized for business in a game arcade.

The invention according to means 7
A gaming system described in means 3 or 6,
In accordance with a conversion operation (an operation of a conversion execution button displayed on the display 124, a conversion operation from a remote controller) with respect to a gaming device (ball lending unit 120) provided corresponding to the gaming machine, the conversion means Do the conversion,
The conversion history output means can specify the history of conversion performed according to the conversion operation for the gaming device as the conversion history for each gaming device (totaling for each unit shown in FIG. 14B). It is a gaming system characterized by output (as a vote).
According to this, since the conversion history for each gaming device can be confirmed, the conversion history can be utilized for business in the game hall.

The invention according to means 8
A gaming system according to any one of means 3, 6 and 7,
The conversion means can convert the second property value (number of 1-yen savings) to the first property value (number of 4-yen savings),
The conversion history output means includes, as the conversion history, conversion from the first property value to the second property value, and conversion from the second property value to the first property value. Each of the game systems is characterized in that it can be specified (as a total vote for each conversion rate shown in FIG. 14C).
According to this, since the conversion history for each loan rate can be confirmed, the conversion history can be utilized for sales at a game hall or the like.

The invention according to means 9 is
A gaming system according to any one of means 3, 6-8,
The conversion history output means outputs the conversion history so that the conversion history can be specified for each time zone when the conversion is performed (as a total vote for each time zone shown in FIG. 14 (d)). It is.
According to this, since the conversion history for each time zone can be confirmed, the conversion history can be utilized for sales at a game hall or the like.

  Note that the means 2, 3, 6 to 9 can also be applied to the management device according to the means 4, 5.

It is a functional block diagram showing an example of the game system which concerns on 1st Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the storage DB managed by the member management apparatus, (b) is a figure showing whether conversion is possible for each upper limit setting, and (c) is managed by the member management apparatus. It is a figure showing an example of member attribute DB. It is a figure showing an example of the conversion upper limit setting screen displayed on the display of a member management apparatus, (a) is the case of conversion from 4 yen to 1 yen, (b) is the case of conversion from 1 yen to 4 yen It is. (A) is a front view showing an example of a pachinko machine and a ball rental unit, (b) is a cross-sectional right side view showing an example of a ball rental unit. It is a figure showing an example of the storage-ball table which the ball lending unit has memorize | stored, (a) is before conversion. (B) is after conversion. It is a flowchart showing an example of the business process which the control part of a ball lending unit performs. It is a flowchart showing an example of the conversion process which is a subroutine which the control part of a ball lending unit performs. It is a flowchart showing an example of the savings replay process which is a subroutine which the control part of a ball lending unit performs. It is a figure showing an example of the screen displayed on the display of a ball lending unit by conversion processing and storage ball replay processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the stored ball replay process which is a subroutine performed by the control unit of the ball lending unit in the gaming system according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the screen displayed on the display of a ball lending unit by the stored ball replay process in the game system according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of DB memorize | stored in the member management apparatus, (a) is stand DB, (b) is conversion log | history DB. It is a figure showing an example of the conversion log | history total process which a member management apparatus performs. It is a figure showing an example of the total vote output by conversion log | history total process, (a) is the total vote for every card, (b) is the total vote for every unit, (c) is the total vote for every conversion rate, (d) is It is a total vote for each time zone. It is a figure showing an example of the total vote for every game machine type which played the game after conversion outputted by conversion history total processing. It is a figure showing an example of the total vote for every game machine classification which received conversion according to conversion history total processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the 3rd game system which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 3rd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of a pachinko machine and the inter-counter counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of an inter-counter counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the display table at the time of simultaneous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a 1st display part display pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a 2nd display part display pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for a display. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of a game total database. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the possession ball special display threshold value table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a management process. It is a continuation of the management process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of possessed ball special display control processing. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of possessed ball special display. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an inter-counter counting unit process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a possessed ball special display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a possessed ball special display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a possessed ball special display screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd possessed ball special display control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the 4th game system which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 4th game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of a pachinko machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a possession management computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of member data. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of card | curd management data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a card unit process. It is a continuation of the card unit process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a holding ball total process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a holding ball division | segmentation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display part of a card unit. It is a front view which shows an example of the external appearance structure of an enclosure type pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the display part provided in each stand counter. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a display in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the 2nd display part display pattern table in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the possessed ball special display in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of a table structure of a LED light emission table. It is a figure which shows an example of the housing of the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type | mold total graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type | mold total graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a firing intensity threshold range table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the passage area data according to discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the implantation area | region data classified by discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of the total graph according to discharge intensity displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the 5th game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information of the own shop displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus, and another shop. It is a figure showing the Example and modification of an apparatus provided with the possession value management means, the conversion means, the totaling means, and the output means in 1st, 2 embodiment which is conversion of a stored ball. It is a figure showing the Example and modification of an apparatus provided with a possession value management means, a conversion means, a totaling means, and an output means in 4th Embodiment which is conversion of a possession ball.

  The gaming device according to the present invention can be used for games on gaming machines (the pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine), and the player Owned value storage means (control unit 122) that stores the possessed value (the number of balls, the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) owned by each for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the possessed value is lent. And a first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen storage balls) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the possession value storage means, and a second ownership value (for example, 1) corresponding to another loan rate. A gaming device (first embodiment, ball lending unit 120 according to the second embodiment, and fourth embodiment) comprising a conversion means (CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process of S118) for conversion into the number of yen storage balls). Card unit 3) .

  Further, the gaming system according to the present invention can be used for a game on the gaming machine and manages the possessed value owned by the player for each loan rate when the owned value is lent. Means (the storage ball table of the control unit 122, the storage ball DB of the member management device 162, the storage ball DB of the hall computer, the CPU of the possession management computer 8) and the lending rate managed by the ownership value management means. Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process in S118, the CPU of the member management device 162 that performs the conversion process, the same) A gaming system comprising: a CPU of a hall computer that performs a conversion process, and a CPU of a possession management computer 8 that performs the conversion process (in the first embodiment and the second embodiment) That gaming system 1, the fourth gaming system 1B) according to the fourth embodiment.

  The gaming system includes a gaming system 1 (FIGS. 1 to 16) according to the first and second embodiments, a gaming system 1A (FIGS. 17 to 45) according to the third embodiment, and A gaming system 1B according to the fourth embodiment (FIGS. 46 to 70) and a gaming system 1C according to the fifth embodiment (FIGS. 71 to 72) are included. Each embodiment will be described below. In the following, an example in which the gaming machine is a pachinko machine and the gaming medium is a pachinko ball will be described. In the following, the database is abbreviated as “DB”, the reader / writer is abbreviated as “R / W”, and step S is abbreviated as “S”.

[1. First Embodiment]
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment is provided on a one-to-one basis corresponding to each of a plurality of pachinko machines 110 arranged on each of a plurality of gaming islands in a game hall. The ball rental unit 120, an island computer 163 provided on each of the plurality of game islands and capable of communicating with all the ball rental units 120 provided on each of the game islands, and a hall computer 160 capable of communicating with all of the island computers 163, The balance management device 161 and the member management device 162 are provided.

  In this gaming system 1, a prepaid card 102 is used as shown in FIG. The prepaid card 102 is a card ID in which the prepaid card 102 can be individually identified, and prepaid balance data indicating a prepaid balance as a valuable value, which are stored as information capable of specifying the valuable value. On the other hand, it is issued by a ball rental unit 120 or a prepaid card issuing device (not shown) provided at a predetermined location in the game hall.

  In the gaming system 1, a membership card 103 is used as shown in FIG. In the membership card 103, a card ID capable of individually identifying the membership card 103 and prepaid balance data indicating a prepaid balance as a valuable value are stored as information capable of specifying the valuable value, and a game that is a member A member ID that can individually identify a player is stored as information that can specify the number of stored balls, which is the possession value owned by the player. Issued by a counter or the like (not shown). Note that the membership card 103 does not store the number of stored balls.

  Here, the hall computer 160, the balance management device 161, the member management device 162, and the island computer 163 will be described with reference to FIG. The hall computer 160, the balance management device 161, and the member management device 162 include a communication unit, a control unit (CPU, ROM, RAM, etc.), input means (keyboard, mouse, etc.), output means (display, etc.), and storage means ( A hard disk or the like). The island computer 163 communicates data between the ball lending unit 120 connected (that is, disposed on the game island where the island computer 163 is provided), the hall computer 160, the remaining amount management device 161, and the member management device 162. It is a relay device that relays.

  The hall computer 160 collects and grasps various information. For example, when a bill is accepted by the bill discriminator 123 of the ball lending unit 120, a signal output from the ball lending unit 120 for one pulse for every 1000 yen received is received and the received amount is totaled. When the ball lending process is performed in the ball lending unit 120, a signal output from the ball lending unit 120 for one pulse for every 100 yen used is received and the amount used is totaled. Note that the information for summing up the usage amount is not limited to a signal of 100 yen per pulse, but may be a signal of 108 yen per pulse in consideration of, for example, consumption tax, or the usage amount itself is transmitted as data. But you can. Further, a signal that can specify the number of ball lending processes may be transmitted, and the number of ball lending processes may be aggregated in the hall computer 160 to specify the amount used. That is, the information for counting the usage amount is not particularly limited as long as it is information that can specify the usage amount.

  When the ball lending unit 120 is reset, the ball lending unit 120 receives a signal output by one pulse for each reset and grasps the reset. Further, when an error occurs in the ball lending unit 120, a signal output from the ball lending unit 120 for one pulse for each error is received, and the error is grasped. In addition, when a game is played in the pachinko machine 110 and the shot balls are counted by a shot ball counter (not shown), a signal output from the shot ball counter every 10 counts is received, and the shot balls are counted. Aggregate the number of balls.

  The remaining amount management device 161 stores a remaining amount DB that stores a prepaid remaining amount that is a valuable value owned by the player and prepaid by the player in association with the card ID of the prepaid card 102 or the member card 103. It is what you have.

  As shown in FIG. 2 (a), the member management device 162 is associated with the member ID and password of the member card 103 and can be used for a game on a gaming machine and has a possession value owned by the player. It has a storage ball DB that stores the number of balls that are stored so that the pachinko balls acquired by the player can be used from the next day. Here, the stored content of the storage ball DB is updated as follows.

  First, when a member card 103 and a counting card or a counting receipt (not shown) are received at a savings terminal (which may also serve as a gift exchange terminal) provided in a gift exchange counter or the like, A storage ball addition request including the member ID read from the member card 103 and the number of acquired balls specified from the counting card or counting receipt is transmitted from the storage terminal to the member management device 162, and the member management device 162 In the stored ball DB, the acquired number of balls included in the stored ball addition request is added as the number of stored balls to the number of stored balls associated with the member ID included in the stored ball addition request.

  Further, when the member card 103 is received and a gift exchange process is performed at a gift exchange terminal provided in a gift exchange counter or the like, the member ID read from the member card 103 and the number of balls used for gift exchange are obtained. The number of stored balls stored in association with the member ID included in the stored ball subtraction request in the stored ball DB of the managed member 162 is transmitted to the member management device 162 from the gift exchange terminal. From this, the number of used balls included in the storage ball subtraction request is subtracted.

  When the ball lending unit 120 accepts the member card 103 and performs the stored ball replay process, the stored ball subtraction including the member ID read from the member card 103 and the number of used balls provided for the stored ball replay. A request is transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162, and in the storage ball DB of the member management device 162, the number of stored balls is stored in association with the member ID included in the stored ball subtraction request. The number of used balls included in the storage ball subtraction request is subtracted.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13 to be described later, when the membership card 103 is received and converted by the ball lending unit 120, the first possession value (converted with the member ID read from the membership card 103) ( For example, the ball management unit 162 sends a savings ball subtraction request including the number of 4 yen savings) and a ball addition request including the member ID and the converted second property value (for example, 1 yen savings). From the first possession value stored in association with the member ID included in the stored ball subtraction request in the stored ball DB of the member management device 162, the first included in the stored ball subtraction request The ownership value is subtracted, and the second ownership value included in the savings ball addition request is added to the second ownership value stored in association with the member ID included in the savings ball addition request.The stored ball subtraction request here is the same as that transmitted in the prize exchange process and the stored ball replay process, and the stored ball addition request is the same as that transmitted in the stored ball process.

  This savings DB functions as an ownership value management means, and as the number of savings that is the ownership value, the number of 4 yen savings that is the first ownership value corresponding to one lending rate (4 yen in this example), The number of 1-yen coins that is the second property value corresponding to another lending rate (1 yen in this example) is managed. In this example, it is not possible to store a single member ID such that the total value of the number of 4-yen stored balls and the number of 1-yen stored balls exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 250,000 balls having the same value as described later). When the number of yen storage is 70,000 and the number of 1 yen storage is 0, if you try to store another 200,000 1 yen coin, you will be notified at the storage terminal that you can only store 1 yen coin up to 180,000 Is done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2C, the member management device 162 has a member attribute DB that stores attribute information such as the name, sex, and age of the member in association with the member ID of the member card 103. It is. In addition, you may make it memorize | store an occupation, a residence area, etc. as attribute information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12A, the member management device 162 associates the ball lending unit 120 with the unit ID that can individually identify the ball lending unit 120 and the lending rate applied to the ball lending unit 120, and Table DB that stores the machine number, model name, and type (for example, the MAX type with a low jackpot probability, the sweet digital type with a high jackpot probability, or the middle type with a medium jackpot probability) corresponding to 120 It is what has. Accordingly, a plurality of unit IDs are included in the same model name, and a plurality of unit IDs are also included in the same type.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12B, the member management device 162 associates the member ID of the member card 103 with the conversion time as the conversion history, and the unit of the converted ball lending unit 120. The ID, the type of the number of stored balls (the number of 4-yen stored balls or the number of 1-yen stored balls), the number of stored balls that have been converted, and the ball lending unit 120 that performed the game (the stored ball replay process) after the conversion. It has a conversion history DB that stores unit IDs. The update of the conversion history DB will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the member management apparatus 162 displays a conversion upper limit setting screen for setting an upper limit for performing the conversion on the display. The setting contents here are transmitted to all the ball lending units 120, stored in the control unit 122 of each ball lending unit 120, and the conversion process is executed according to the stored contents.

  Here, in the conversion upper limit setting screen shown in FIG. 3 (a), as an upper limit when converting from the number of 4-yen stored balls to the number of 1-yen stored balls, the upper limit is 1 "the sum of the number of 4-yen stored balls and the number of 1-yen stored balls. ”, Or upper limit 2“ the number of 1-yen stored balls after conversion ”can be set by selecting a radio button, and at least one of the selected upper limit 1 or 2 is set as an upper limit value. A specific value (250,000 balls in this example) can be set. Note that, as in this example, the upper limit 1 or 2 can be selected, and either one can be forcibly applied without selecting the upper limit 1 or 2.

  Specifically, when the upper limit of “the sum of the number of 4-yen stored balls after conversion and the sum of the number of 1-yen stored balls” does not exceed the specific value, the conversion is possible. When Y is the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted and Z is the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion, when the formula 1 of (XY) + 4Y + Z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied It can be converted. On the left side of Equation 1, “XY” in the first term is the remaining number of 4-yen stored balls when converted, and becomes 0 when all are converted. In the left side of Equation 1, “4Y” in the second term is the number of 1-yen stored balls converted from the number of 4-yen stored balls. Therefore, in the case of the total number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a), when converting from the number of 4-yen stored balls to the number of 1-yen stored balls, as shown in the left column of FIG. 2 (b), the member ID of K-00001 Can be converted because the solution of the left side of Equation 1 is 20,000 balls, and the conversion of the member ID of K-00002 is impossible because the solution of the left side of Equation 1 is 280,000 balls, and the member ID of K-00003 Cannot be converted because the solution on the left side of Equation 1 is 260,000 balls.

  In addition, when the upper limit of 2 “the number of 1-yen stored balls after conversion” does not exceed the specific value, “can be converted” means that the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, and the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted among X is Y , When the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is Z, conversion is possible when Expression 2 of 4Y + Z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied. On the left side of Equation 2, the meaning of the first term “4Y” is the same as that of Equation 1. Accordingly, in the case of converting all of the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a) from the number of 4-yen stored balls to the number of 1-yen stored balls, as shown in the middle column of FIG. 2 (b), the member ID of K-00001 Can be converted because the solution on the left side of Equation 2 is 20,000 balls, and the conversion of the member ID of K-00002 is impossible because the solution on the left side of Equation 2 is 280,000 balls, and the member ID of K-00003 is Cannot be converted because the solution on the left side of Equation 2 is 260,000 balls.

  In this example, before the upper limit 1 or 2 is determined, the upper limit 0 is determined. The upper limit of 0 is to allow conversion when “the number of 1-yen stored balls converted from the number of 4-yen stored balls” does not exceed the specific value, and the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, If the number of 4-yen balls to be converted is Y, and the equation 0 of 4Y ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied, the determination proceeds to the upper limit 1 or 2. The meaning of “4Y” on the left side of Expression 0 is the same as Expressions 1 and 2. Therefore, in the case of converting all of the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2A from the number of stored 4-yen balls to the number of stored 1-yen balls, although not shown, for the member ID of K-00001, the solution on the left side of Equation 0 is 10,000. Conversion is possible because it is 2000 balls, and conversion of the left side of Equation 0 is not possible because the solution on the left side of Equation 0 is 280,000 for the member ID of K-00002, and the solution on the left side of Equation 0 is not possible for the member ID of K-00003. Since it is 240,000 balls, conversion is possible.

  In addition, on the conversion upper limit setting screen shown in FIG. 3B, as an upper limit when converting the number of 1-yen stored balls to the number of 4-yen stored balls, the upper limit 1 ′ “the sum of the converted 1-yen and 4-yen stored balls ”, Upper limit 2 ′“ number of 4 yen stored balls after conversion ”, or upper limit 0 ′“ number of 4 yen stored balls converted from 1 yen stored balls ”can be set by selecting a radio button, For any one of the selected upper limits 1 ′ to 3 ′, a specific value (250,000 balls in this example) can be set as the upper limit value.

  Specifically, when the upper limit 1 ′ “the sum of the number of 1-yen stored balls and the number of 4-yen stored balls” does not exceed the above specific value, the conversion is possible when the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is x, When x represents the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted and x represents the 4-yen stored-ball number before conversion, z (x−y) + (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) This means that conversion is possible when Expression 1 ′ is satisfied. In the left side of the expression 1 ', the first term "xy" is the remaining number of 1-yen balls when converted, and becomes 0 when all are converted. In the left side of Equation 1 ', the second term "y / 4" is the number of 4-yen stored balls converted from the number of 1-yen stored balls. Accordingly, in the case of converting all of the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a) from the number of 1-yen stored balls to the number of 4-yen stored balls, although not shown, for the member ID of K-00001, the solution on the left side of Equation 1 ′ is 5 Conversion is possible because it is a thousand coins, and conversion for the member ID of K-00002 is impossible because the number of 1-yen storage balls before conversion is 0, and for the member ID of K-00003, the solution on the left side of Equation 1 ′ is 60,000 Since it is 5,000 balls, conversion is possible.

  In addition, when the upper limit of 2 ′ “the number of 4-yen stored balls after conversion” does not exceed the specific value, “can be converted” means that the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is x, y, when the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is z, conversion is possible when the expression 2 ′ of (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied. On the left side of the formula 2 ', the meaning of the first term "y / 4" is the same as that of the formula 1'. Accordingly, in the case of converting all of the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2A from the number of 1-yen stored balls to the number of 4-yen stored balls, although not shown, for the member ID of K-00001, the solution on the left side of Equation 2 ′ is 5 Conversion is possible because it is a thousand coins, and conversion for the member ID of K-00002 is impossible because the number of 1-yen storage balls before conversion is 0, and for the member ID of K-00003, the solution on the left side of Equation 2 ′ is 60,000 Since it is 5,000 balls, conversion is possible.

  In addition, when the upper limit of 0 ′ “the number of 4-yen stored balls converted from the number of 1-yen stored balls” does not exceed the specific value, “convertible” means that the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is converted between x and x When the number of 1-yen stored balls is y, conversion is possible when the expression 0 ′ of y / 4 ≦ specific value (250,000 balls in this example) is satisfied. The significance of “y / 4” on the left side of the expression 0 ′ is the same as the expressions 1 ′ and 2 ′. Therefore, in the case of converting all of the number of stored balls shown in FIG. 2 (a) from the number of 1-yen stored balls to the number of 4-yen stored balls, although not shown in the figure, for the member ID of K-00001, the solution on the left side of Equation 0 ′ is 2. Conversion is possible because it is a thousand coins, and conversion for the member ID of K-00002 is impossible because the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is 0, and for the member ID of K-00003, the solution on the left side of Equation 0 ′ is 5,000. Since it becomes a ball, it can be converted.

  The member management device 162 is not limited to the one provided in the game hall, and may be provided outside the game hall to manage a plurality of stores. The contents of the storage DB and conversion history DB stored in the member management device 162 may be viewed from the hall computer 160 and other management devices.

  The member management device 162 creates various tabulations based on the stored contents of the conversion history DB, which will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the pachinko machine 110 will be described. The pachinko machine 110 is an example of a gaming machine, and is provided corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 (here, adjacent to the right side of the ball lending unit 120), as shown in FIGS. A so-called CR-type pachinko machine that pays out and lends pachinko balls from the pachinko machine 110 in accordance with a ball lending process or a replaying process of stored balls by communicating with the corresponding ball lending unit 120. is there. The pachinko machine 110 is arranged according to the model of the pachinko machine 110 on the game island provided in the game hall, and is individually identified by a unique machine number.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the pachinko machine 110 has a game area, an upper plate, a lower plate, a launching handle, and the like on the front surface, and a remaining frequency indicator 114, a ball lending button 115, 1 and a card return button 116, and as shown in FIG. 1, a game control board 111, a payout control board 112, a ball payout device 113, etc. are provided therein, and each of these components is as shown in FIG. It is connected to the.

  The game control board 111 controls the gaming state in the pachinko machine 110. The payout control board 112 is communicably connected to the ball lending communication unit 121 a of the ball lending unit 120, and governs communication between the pachinko machine 110 and the ball lending unit 120. Thereby, signals are exchanged with the ball lending unit 120 in the ball lending process (S300 in FIG. 6) and the storage ball replay process (S500). The payout control board 112 is connected to the ball payout device 113 and controls the ball payout device 113. The ball payout device 113 pays out a pachinko ball that is an integral multiple of a predetermined unit number (for example, 25 balls) in the ball lending process and the stored ball replay process, and is given to the player as a result of the game. Pachinko balls (so-called prize balls) are paid out.

  The remaining number display 114 is a display for displaying the remaining number specified from the prepaid balance recorded in the prepaid card 102 or the member card 103 received by the card R / W 125 of the corresponding ball lending unit 120. Yes, here it consists of a two-digit 7-segment display. The remaining frequency indicator 114 displays the remaining frequency by receiving a frequency display signal indicating the remaining frequency from the ball lending communication unit 121a. The remaining frequency included in the frequency display signal is a quotient calculated by the expression “prepaid balance / 100 yen”.

  The ball lending button 115 accepts a ball lending operation for performing a ball lending operation using the prepaid balance recorded on the prepaid card 102 or the member card 103 received by the card R / W 125 of the corresponding ball lending unit 120. Button. When the ball lending button 115 is operated, a lending input signal is sent to the ball lending communication unit 121a via a lending input signal line provided via a detection circuit (not shown) between the ball lending communication unit 121a. , And the detection circuit detects the input of the lending input signal, so that the control unit 122 recognizes that the ball lending button 115 has been operated and performs a ball lending process (S300 in FIG. 6).

  The card return button 116 is a button for accepting a return operation for returning the prepaid card 102 or the member card 103 accepted by the card R / W 125 of the corresponding ball lending unit 120. When this card return button 116 is operated, a return input signal is sent to the ball lending communication unit 121a via a return input signal line provided between the ball lending communication unit 121a and a detection circuit (not shown). Is detected and the detection circuit detects the input of the return input signal, the control unit 122 recognizes that the card return button 116 has been operated, and performs a card return process (S600 in FIG. 6).

  The remaining frequency indicator 114, the ball lending button 115, and the card return button 116 are provided on the front surface (here, the upper plate) of the pachinko machine 110 as shown in FIG. Since it is connected to the ball lending unit 120, it belongs to the ball lending unit 120 constituting the gaming apparatus. The ball lending button 115 and the card return button 116 may be provided in the ball lending unit 120.

  In the pachinko machine 110, when the launch handle is operated, the pachinko balls on the upper plate are driven into the game area and a game is played. Then, when the hit ball that has been driven into the game area wins the start winning opening, the variable display device starts to fluctuate. When the display result of the symbol displayed on the variable display device is in a specific mode, a big hit occurs. . Further, when the hitting ball wins a winning opening (a start winning opening, a general winning opening, or a big winning opening that is opened when a big hit is made), a prize ball is paid out from the ball paying device 113 under the control of the payout control board 112. The paid-out prize ball is first guided to the upper plate, and when the upper plate is full, it is guided to the lower plate. Although not shown, the hit balls are collected in an out tank (not shown) provided behind the pachinko machine 110, counted by a hit ball counter, and taken into the game island after counting.

  Next, the configuration of the ball lending unit 120 will be described. The ball lending unit 120 is an example of a gaming device, and corresponds to a pachinko machine 110 that is a gaming machine (here, adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 110) as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 4) and has a vertically long box shape. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), a bill insertion slot 123a, a protruding portion 120a, a card insertion slot 25a and the like are provided on the front surface thereof. As shown in b), a bill discriminator 123, a ball lending communication unit 121a, an on-site communication unit 121b, a control unit 122, a card R / W 125, a prepaid card stocker 125b, and the like are provided therein, and the right side surface of the protruding portion 120a A touch panel display 124 is provided on the side (that is, the side facing the player), and these components are connected as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the ball lending communication unit 121a is communicably connected to the payout control board 112 of the pachinko machine 110. As shown in FIG. 1, the on-site communication unit 121b is communicably connected to the hall computer 160, the balance management device 161, and the member management device 162 via the island computer 163. It governs communication between the two.

  The control unit 122 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, an EEPROM, and the like. Each processing element stored in the ROM is executed by the CPU using the RAM as a work area, whereby each component included in the ball lending unit 120 is provided. The various operations are performed by controlling the operation. In the RAM of the control unit 122, although not shown, the card ID read from the prepaid card 102 or the member card 103 received by the card R / W 125 and the prepaid balance are stored.

  The RAM of the control unit 122 stores a storage table as shown in FIG. In this storage ball table, the number of stored balls (in this example, the number of 4 yen storage balls and the number of 1 yen storage balls) managed by the member management device 162 in association with the member ID of the member card 103 received by the card R / W 125 is loaned. Stored for each rate. This stored ball table functions as an owned value storage means for storing the number of stored balls as the owned value for each loan rate when the owned value is lent. The stored contents of this storage ball table are updated as follows.

  First, when the member card 103 is received and the verification process (S100 in FIG. 6) is performed, the member ID read from the member card 103, the input password, and the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120 are: It is transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162. In the member management device 162, the member ID and the password stored in the storage ball DB are collated, and if the collation result is OK, The number of stored balls (the number of 4-yen stored balls and the number of 1-yen stored balls) stored in association with the member ID is returned to the ball lending unit 120, and the member ID and the response are returned in the storage table of the ball lending unit 120. The number of stored balls has been memorized.

  Further, when the storage ball replay process (S500 in FIG. 6) is performed, the number of balls used for the storage ball replay from the stored number of balls (the number of 4-yen stored balls or the number of 1-yen stored balls) in the stored-ball table. Is subtracted. Then, the stored ball subtraction request including the member ID and the number of balls used is transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162.

  Further, when the conversion process (S400 in FIG. 6) is performed, the number of stored balls to be converted is subtracted from the stored number of stored balls (for example, the number of 4-yen stored balls) in the stored ball table, and the number of stored balls (for example, 1) The number of stored balls converted into the number of yen stored balls) is added. Then, the storage ball subtraction request including the member ID and the number of stored balls to be converted and the storage ball addition request including the member ID and the converted number of stored balls are transmitted from the ball lending unit 120 to the member management device 162.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the bill validator 123 accepts the insertion of bills (1000 yen bills, 2000 yen bills, 5000 yen bills, or 10000 yen bills) from the bill insertion slot 123a and identifies the bills. To do. The identified banknote is transported through the banknote passage 123b provided behind the banknote identification machine 123 and taken into the game island, and is collected in a safe provided at the end of the game island via the transport path provided in the game island. Is done.

  The touch panel display 124 is a display device that displays various types of information and an input device that accepts various types of information. While the membership card 103 is being accepted, the display 124 displays a “conversion button” for accepting a conversion operation and a “reserved ball replay button” for accepting a replay operation for a stored ball, as indicated by D00 in FIG. Other display contents on the display 124 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the card R / W 125 accepts the insertion of the prepaid card 102 from the card insertion slot 125a and reads the card ID and the prepaid balance from the prepaid card 102. The insertion of the membership card 103 is accepted from 125a, and the card ID, the prepaid balance and the membership ID are read from the membership card 103. The prepaid card stocker 125b is provided behind the card R / W 125 and stores a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prepaid cards 102. In this prepaid card stocker 125b, the prepaid card 102 in which the ball lending process is performed and the prepaid balance becomes zero is taken in and stored. In addition, when a bill is received by the bill discriminator 123 in a state where the prepaid card 102 is not received by the card R / W 125, one of the prepaid cards 102 stored in the prepaid card stocker 125b is It is conveyed from the prepaid card stocker 125b to the card R / W 125 and set in the card R / W 125, and the card R / W 125 reads the card ID from the set prepaid card 102.

  Next, the operation of the ball lending unit 120 will be described. In the following, an example in which the lending rate (ball lending rate) of the ball lending unit 120 is 1 yen, and conversion is performed from 4 yen to 1 yen in the conversion process will be described.

  First, FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the business process performed by the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120. The control unit 122 waits for reception of the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 by the card R / W 125 in S01, waits for reception of banknotes by the banknote identification machine in S02, and operates the ball lending button 115 in S03. In step S04, the operation of the conversion button is waited. In step S05, the operation of the storage ball replay button is waited. In step S06, the operation of the card return button 116 is waited, and the loop of steps S01 to S06 is repeated.

  When the control unit 122 determines in S01 that the prepaid card 102 or the membership card 103 is received (YES), the control unit 122 performs a checking process in S100, and when it is determined in S02 that the banknote is received (YES). If the deposit process of S200 is performed, and it is determined in S03 that the ball lending button 115 is operated (YES), the ball lending process is performed in S300, and the conversion button is operated in S04 (YES). If it is determined, a conversion process (FIG. 7) is performed in S400, and if it is determined in S05 that there is an operation of a storage ball replay button (YES), a storage ball replay process (FIG. 8) is performed in S500. If it is determined in S06 that the card return button 116 is operated (YES), a card return process is performed in S600. After the processes of S100, S200, S300, S400, S500, and S600, the process returns to the loop of S01 to S06.

  Here, in the collation process of S100, when the prepaid card 102 is received, the remaining amount collation process is performed. This remaining amount collation processing transmits the received card ID and the prepaid balance from the prepaid card 102 to the remaining amount management device 161, and stores the transmitted card ID, the prepaid balance and the card ID stored in the balance DB. This is a process of waiting for a return of the collation result from the balance management device 161 for collating with the prepaid balance, storing the prepaid balance in the RAM if the collation result is OK, and discharging the prepaid card 102 if NG.

  When the membership card 103 is received, the remaining amount matching process is performed and the number of stored balls is verified. This remaining amount collation processing transmits the card ID read from the accepted member card 103 and the prepaid balance to the remaining amount management device 161, and the transmitted card ID, the prepaid balance and the card ID stored in the remaining amount DB and Processing for waiting for a reply of the collation result from the balance management device 161 that collates with the prepaid balance, if the collation result is OK, storing the read prepaid balance in the RAM, and if NG, discharging the membership card 103 It is. The stored ball number collation process receives an input of a personal identification number, transmits the member ID read from the accepted membership card 103 and the input personal identification number to the member management device 162, and transmits the transmitted member ID. And the response of the collation result from the member management device 162 that collates the personal identification number with the member ID and personal identification number stored in the storage DB is awaited, and if the collation result is OK, it is transmitted from the member management device 162. This is a process of storing the number of stored balls (the number of stored 4-yen balls and the number of stored 1-yen balls) in a stored-table table in the RAM, and if it is NG, the member card 103 is discharged.

  In the deposit processing of S200, if the accepted banknote is identified as NG, the banknote is ejected. If OK, it is determined whether or not a card (prepaid card 102 or member card 103) is being accepted. The card ID of the card and the deposit amount, which is the amount of the identified banknote, are transmitted to the remaining amount management device 161. If not received, the prepaid card 102 is conveyed from the prepaid card stocker 125b to the card R / W 125. The card ID is read and the read card ID and the deposit amount are transmitted to the remaining amount management device 161, and the transmitted deposit amount is stored in the prepaid balance stored in the remaining amount DB in association with the transmitted card ID. When the addition completion notification is received from the remaining amount management device 161 that performs the process of adding, and the addition completion notification is received, the accepted banknote Uptake in the game island, adding the pre-fill amount of money to the prepaid balance which is stored in the RAM, to record the prepaid balance after the addition to the card.

  In the ball lending process of S300, the used amount (if the prepaid remaining amount exceeds the predetermined ball lending set amount, this is the ball lending set amount, and if the prepaid remaining amount does not exceed the ball lending set amount, The prepaid remaining amount) is paid out from the corresponding pachinko machine 110, the used amount is subtracted from the prepaid remaining amount stored in the RAM, and the prepaid remaining amount after the subtraction is recorded on the card. If the prepaid card 102 is the prepaid card 102 and the prepaid balance after subtraction is 0, the prepaid card 102 is stored in the card stocker 125b.

  The conversion process of S400 will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, and the storage ball replay process of S500 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the card return process in S600, the accepted card (prepaid card 102 or member card 103) is returned.

  Here, while the deposit process, the ball lending process, and the storage ball replay process are being performed, the execution of the conversion process is limited. Specifically, even if an operation of the conversion button is accepted, it is invalid. According to this, the ownership value (the number of stored balls stored in the storage table) is changed by performing the conversion process while the deposit process, the ball lending process, and the stored ball replay process are performed, and the game Can be a nuisance. In the case where the gaming machine is a sealed pachinko machine, the execution of the conversion process is restricted while the pachinko ball is being fired.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of conversion processing that is a subroutine performed by the control unit 122. If the control unit 122 is accepting the membership card 103 and determines in S04 that there is an operation of the “conversion button” displayed on the touch panel display 124 (YES), the deposit, Performs ball lending, replay of stored balls, and lock processing of card return. Specifically, it is invalid to accept the bill lending button 115, the stored ball replay button, or the card return button 116 without accepting the bill by the bill validator 123. According to this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possessed value (the stored prepaid balance or the number of stored balls stored in the stored ball table) changes during conversion and the player is confused. If the gaming machine is a sealed pachinko machine, the launch of pachinko balls is also locked.

  Next, in S102, the pre-conversion ball number display is displayed on the display 124. In the pre-conversion ball number display, as shown in D102 of FIG. 9, it is displayed that the payment, the ball lending, the replay, and the card return that are locked in S101 cannot be performed, and the first possession before the conversion The number of 4-yen storage balls (for example, 3000 balls) that is the value is converted into the first display unit number (the number of 2000-dollar boxes) converted by the predetermined display unit “2000 balls” and the second number before conversion. The second display unit number (the number of 2000-dollar boxes) converted from the predetermined display unit of “2000 balls” is displayed as the number of 1-yen storage balls (e.g., 8000 balls) that is the property value of . Here, the “predetermined display unit” is a unit for conversion so that the player can easily grasp the amount of possession value, and in this example is “2000 balls”. A portion where the converted value is less than 2000 balls is displayed in a dollar box smaller than the 2000 balls. Therefore, in this example, 1 dollar box of 2000 balls and 1 small dollar box representing 1000 balls are displayed as the first display unit number, and 4 dollar boxes of 2000 balls are displayed as the second display unit number. The Further, in the pre-conversion ball number display, the dollar box is displayed in white. In addition, as a button for accepting setting of the number of converted balls, a “designation button” for specifying the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted and a “all button” for converting all of the 4-yen stored-ball numbers are displayed. Here, the “designation button” functions as a reception unit that accepts designation of the first property value to be converted by the conversion unit. In S103, the operation of the “designation button” is waited, and in S104, the operation of the “all button” is waited.

  If there is an “all button” operation in S104 (YES), it is determined in S105 whether or not the number of stored balls is within the upper limit set in FIG. Here, it is first determined whether or not the upper limit 0 is satisfied. When the upper limit 0 is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the upper limit 1 or 2 is satisfied. According to this, since the upper limit 1 or 2 is not satisfied when the upper limit 0 is not satisfied, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the upper limit 1 or 2 is satisfied.

  If it is determined in S105 that the number of stored balls after conversion is not within the upper limit range (NO), that is, the upper limit 0 is not satisfied, or the upper limit 0 is satisfied but the upper limit 1 or 2 is not satisfied, the conversion is impossible. Then, the conversion impossible display 1 is displayed on the display 124. In this non-convertible display 1, although not shown, a message indicating that conversion cannot be performed because the number of stored balls after conversion exceeds the upper limit, the “designation button”, and a “cancel button” for canceling the conversion are displayed. In S110, the operation of the “designation button” is waited. In S111, the operation of the “stop button” is waited. If there is an operation of “designation button” in S110 (YES), the process proceeds to S112. If there is an operation of “stop button” in S111 (YES), the conversion process is terminated.

  Thus, since conversion is not performed unless the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit range, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the storage amount of stored balls increases excessively with conversion.

  If it is determined in S105 that the number of stored balls after conversion is not within the upper limit, the result of the determination is transmitted to the member management device 162, and the member management device 162 transmits the determination history ( For example, the number of determinations, the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120 that performed the determination, and the member ID that is the target of the determination may be managed.

  In addition, in the conversion disable display 1 of S106, the allowable number of balls may be notified so that the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit range. For example, the number of 4 yen storage balls is 60,000 balls, the number of 1 yen storage balls is 20,000 balls, and the upper limit of 1 is “the sum of the converted 4 yen storage balls and 1 yen storage balls is less than 250,000 balls”. If the total number of 4-yen stored balls is converted, the solution on the left side of equation 1 is 260,000, so conversion is impossible. However, if 56,000 of the 4-yen stored balls are converted, the equation Since the solution on one left side is 248,000 balls, conversion is possible, so the 56,000 balls are notified as the allowable number of balls. The display 124 that notifies the allowable number of balls functions as a notification unit that notifies the first possession value (allowable number of balls) that satisfies the conversion condition. According to this, since conversion can be performed as much as possible, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  If the number of balls after conversion is within the upper limit range in S105 (YES), that is, if it is determined that conversion is possible by satisfying the upper limit 0 and 1, or the upper limit 0 and 2, the converted ball count display in S109. Is displayed on the display 124. In this converted ball number display, as shown in D109 of FIG. 9, the number of 4-yen stored balls (0 balls in this example), which is the first property value after conversion, is a predetermined display unit of “2000 balls”. The first display unit number converted in (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) and the 1-yen stored ball number (20,000 balls in this example) that is the second property value after conversion are the predetermined display units. The number of second display units converted in “2000 balls” (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) is displayed. In this example, since all are converted, the dollar box is not displayed as the first display unit number, and 10 dollar boxes of 2000 balls are displayed as the second display unit number. In the converted ball count display, the dollar box is displayed in black. In addition, an “execution button” for executing the conversion and the “stop button” are displayed. In S116, the “execution button” operation is waited. In S117, the “stop button” operation is waited. If there is an operation of “Cancel button” in S117 (YES), the conversion process is terminated.

  If there is an “execute button” operation in S116 (YES), the conversion is executed in S118, and a display during conversion is displayed on the display 124. When the conversion is executed here, in the storage table shown in FIG. 5, (a) the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is 3000 balls, the number of 1-yen storage balls is 8000 balls, and (b) the number of 4-yen storage balls after conversion is 0 balls, 1 The number of yen storage will be 20,000. At the same time, communication with the member management device 162 (transmission of a storage ball subtraction request and a storage ball addition request) is performed, and the same conversion (update of the storage ball DB) is performed also in the storage ball DB shown in FIG. And the conversion history is stored in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. Thus, since the conversion is performed in the ball lending unit 120, the processing load on the member management apparatus 162 can be reduced. In addition to the operation of the “execute button”, the conversion may be executed when a conversion instruction is received from the remote controller operated by the store clerk (that is, when the conversion operation is performed by the remote controller). In the display during conversion, as shown in D118a of FIG. 9, the fact that conversion is in progress is displayed by blinking characters and arrows.

  In S119, the end of the conversion is waited. When the conversion is completed (YES), in S120, the deposit, the ball lending, the replay of the stored ball, and the card return lock performed in S101 are released, and the conversion end display is displayed. This is displayed on the display 124. In the conversion end display, as shown in D120a of FIG. 9, the characters indicating that the conversion has ended and the first display unit number and the second display unit number after conversion are displayed as in D109. In S121, the process waits for the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses (YES), the conversion process ends.

  There is an operation of the “designation button” in S103 (YES), and when designation of the number of balls to be converted is received on the ball number designation screen (not shown), in S112, the number of 4-yen stored balls stored in the storage ball table is It is determined whether or not the number of balls is greater than or equal to the specified number. If it is determined in S112 that the number of 4-yen storage balls is not equal to or greater than the specified number (NO), the non-convertible display 2 is displayed on the display 124 in S113. In this non-convertible display 2, although not shown, a message indicating that conversion cannot be performed because the number of 4-yen stored balls is not equal to or greater than the specified number of balls and the “stop button” are displayed. In S114, the operation of the “stop button” is waited. If there is an operation of “Cancel button” in S114 (YES), the conversion process is terminated. It should be noted that, in the conversion impossible display 2 as well, the “designation button” is displayed in the same manner as in the conversion impossible display 1, and if there is an operation of the “designation button”, the process proceeds to S112 to accept re-designation of the number of balls to be converted. It may be.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S112 that the number of 4-yen storage balls is equal to or greater than the specified number of balls (YES), the converted ball number display is displayed on the display 124 in S115. In this converted ball number display, as indicated by D115, as in D109 of FIG. 9, the number of 4-yen stored balls (2000 balls in this example), which is the first property value after conversion, is a predetermined display unit. The first display unit number converted in “2000 balls” (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) and the 1-yen stored ball number (12000 balls in this example), which is the second property value after conversion, The number of second display units (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) converted by “2000 balls” which is a predetermined display unit is displayed. In this example, because of partial conversion, one dollar box of 2000 balls is displayed as the first display unit number, and 6 dollar boxes of 2000 balls are displayed as the second display unit number. In the converted ball count display, the dollar box is displayed in black. In addition, an “execution button” for executing the conversion and the “stop button” are displayed. In S116, the “execution button” operation is waited. In S117, the “stop button” operation is waited. If there is an operation of “Cancel button” in S117 (YES), the conversion process is terminated.

  If there is an “execute button” operation in S116 (YES), the conversion is executed in S118, and a display during conversion is displayed on the display 124. When conversion is performed here, in the storage table shown in FIG. 5, (a) the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is 3000 balls and the number of 1-yen storage balls is 8000 balls, although not shown, the number of 4-yen storage balls after conversion is 2000 balls, 1 The number of yen storage will be 12,000. At the same time, communication with the member management device 162 (transmission of a storage ball subtraction request and a storage ball addition request) is performed, and the same conversion (update of the storage ball DB) is performed also in the storage ball DB shown in FIG. And the conversion history is stored in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. Thus, since the conversion is performed in the ball lending unit 120, the processing load on the member management apparatus 162 can be reduced. In addition to the operation of the “execute button”, the conversion may be executed when a conversion instruction is received from the remote controller operated by the store clerk (that is, when the conversion operation is performed by the remote controller). In the display during conversion, as in D118a in FIG. 9, the fact that conversion is in progress is displayed by blinking characters and arrows as shown in D118b.

  In the above example, when the conversion is performed, the ball lending unit 120 transmits a stored ball subtraction request and a stored ball addition request to the member management device 162, and the stored ball subtraction request is a prize exchange process or a stored ball replay process. It has been described that the request for adding the accumulated balls is the same as that transmitted in the accumulated ball processing, but the content transmitted by communication with the member management device 162 has been converted. Any content that can be specified is acceptable. For example, if the number of 4 yen storage balls before conversion and 3000 yen for 1 yen storage is 8000 balls after conversion to 2000 yen for 1 yen storage and 12000 balls for 1 yen storage, as a first example, 4 yen storage balls Addition / subtraction signal that subtracts (uses) several thousand balls and adds 4000 balls of 1 yen (stores balls) or, as a second example, subtracts (uses) 1000 balls of 4-yen balls to convert Or a conversion result signal indicating that the number of 4-yen storage balls after conversion is 2000 balls and the number of 1-yen storage balls is 12000 balls, as a third example.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 13 to be described later, the member management apparatus 162 updates the storage ball DB and the conversion history DB based on the reception of the storage ball subtraction request and the storage ball addition request. The member management device 162 transmits the updated number of balls to the ball lending unit 120, and if the updated number of balls does not match the number of balls stored in the ball table of the ball lending unit 120, It may be an error.

  In S119, the end of the conversion is waited. When the conversion is completed (YES), in S120, the deposit, the ball lending, the replay of the stored ball, and the card return lock performed in S101 are released, and the conversion end display is displayed. This is displayed on the display 124. In this conversion end display, as in D120a of FIG. 9, as shown in D120b, characters indicating that conversion has ended, and the number of first display units and second display units after conversion are the same as in D115. Is displayed. In S121, the process waits for the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses (YES), the conversion process ends.

  In FIG. 7 described above, the example in which the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 is 1 yen and is converted from 4 yen to 1 yen has been described, but the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 is 4 yen, When converted from Yen to 4 Yen (or even if the loan rate is 1 Yen, it can be converted from 1 Yen to 4 Yen) After YES in S105 or S112, S107 saves 1 Yen in S107 When the total number of balls or the specified number of 1-yen balls is converted to 4-yen balls (that is, 1-yen balls to be converted is divided by 4), the 4-yen balls will be fractional Determine whether or not. If it is determined in S107 that no fraction is given (NO), the process proceeds to S109 or S115.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fraction is output (YES), the conversion impossible display 3 is displayed on the display 124 in S108. In this non-convertible display 3, although not shown in the figure, the fact that conversion cannot be performed because the number of 4-yen coins after conversion is displayed, the “designation button”, and the “stop button” are displayed. For example, if you convert 1000 yen for 1 yen, the number of stored 4 yen becomes 2500.25, and if you convert 10002 for 1 yen, the number of stored 4 yen becomes 2500.5, and 10003 stored number is 10003. Is converted to a 4-yen reserve ball number of 2500.75, and in both cases, a fraction is output and conversion is impossible. In S110, the operation of the “designation button” is waited. In S111, the operation of the “stop button” is waited.

  In addition, when the fraction comes out, the maximum value that does not come out of the 1 yen stored ball number to be converted is converted into the 4 yen stored ball number based on the reception of the conversion execution operation from the player or automatically. You may make it do. Specifically, it is only necessary to convert 10,000 balls out of 10001 balls of 1 yen to obtain 2500 balls of 4 yen and 1 ball of remaining 1 yen. Instead of converting the maximum value, it may be possible to select and convert a multiple (for example, a multiple of 100 balls) with no fraction.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a stored ball replay process that is a subroutine performed by the control unit 122. In the following, an example in which 200 pachinko balls are paid out from the pachinko machine 110 in one saving ball replay process when the lending rate is 1 yen will be described. Note that the number of pachinko balls to be paid out in a single storage ball replay process is not limited to 200 balls. Further, in the storage ball replay process, the pachinko balls are not limited to paying out only from the pachinko machine 110, but are paid out only from the ball lending unit 120, or are paid out from the pachinko machine 110 and the ball lending unit 120. May be.

  If the control unit 122 is accepting the membership card 103 and determines in S05 that there is an operation of the “restore ball replay button” displayed on the touch panel display 124 (YES), in S201, It is determined whether or not the number of 1-yen stored balls stored in the storage table is 200 balls or more. If it is determined in S201 that the number of 1-yen storage balls is 200 or more (YES), in S202, the pachinko machine 110 is instructed to pay out 200 pachinko balls, and in S203, stored in the storage table. 200 balls are subtracted from the number of 1-yen stored balls, and the member management device 162 is sent a storage-subtraction request indicating that the number of 1-yen stored balls has been subtracted (used) by 200, and the replay processing of the stored balls is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S201 that the number of 1-yen stored balls is not 200 or more (NO), it is determined in S204 whether or not there is a 4-yen stored-ball number stored in the stored-ball table. If it is determined in S204 that there is no 4-yen storage number (NO), a storage ball replay impossibility display is displayed on the display 124 in S205, and the storage ball replay process is terminated. In this display indicating that the stored ball replay is not possible, it is displayed that the stored ball replay process cannot be performed because the number of 1 yen stored balls is insufficient and the number of 4 yen stored balls is not present.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S204 that the number of 4-yen storage balls is present (YES), a conversion suggestion display is displayed on the display 124 in S206. In this conversion suggestion display, as shown in D206, since the number of 1-yen stored balls is insufficient, it is displayed whether or not to convert from the number of 4-yen stored balls. In addition, a “not-converted button” for not executing the conversion and a “convert-button” for executing the conversion are displayed. In S207, the operation of the “button not to be converted” is waited, and in S208, the operation of the “button to be converted” is waited. If there is an operation of “button not to convert” in S207 (YES), the stored ball replay process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there is an operation of the “convert button” in S208 (YES), the process proceeds to S101 of the conversion process described in FIG. 7, and the conversion from the 4-yen stored ball number to the 1-yen stored ball number is performed. Then, after the conversion process is completed, the stored ball replay button is operated again, and the process proceeds to S201 of the stored ball replay process described with reference to FIG. 8. If the converted number of 1-yen stored balls is 200 balls or more, the pachinko process is performed in S202. The ball is paid out.

[2. Second Embodiment]
In the gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment, the operation of the ball lending unit 120 is different compared to the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, when a “conversion button” is displayed on the menu screen at D00 in FIG. 6 and there is an operation of the conversion button (YES in S04), a conversion process (S400) is performed, and one loan rate ( In the second implementation, the example in which the designated number of balls or all of the possession value (for example, 4 yen) is converted to the possession value of another lending rate (for example, 1 yen) (that is, batch conversion) has been explained. In the form, when the “conversion button” is not displayed on the menu screen at D00, and there is an operation of the “replay button” and the ownership value of the loan rate is insufficient, the ownership of one loan rate is owned The designated number of balls in the value is converted (that is, converted each time) into the possession value of another loan rate “in each case”. Even if conversion is performed each time, the password is input only once when the member card 103 is received, and the password is not required to be input every time the conversion is performed.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a stored ball replay process that is a subroutine performed by the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit in the gaming system 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, as in the first embodiment, an example in which 200 pachinko balls are paid out from the pachinko machine 110 in one saving ball replay process when the lending rate is 1 yen will be described.

  When the control unit 122 is accepting the membership card 103 and determines in S05 of FIG. 6 that there is an operation of the “restore ball replay button” displayed on the touch panel display 124 (YES), The process proceeds to S201. Since S201 to S208 are the same as those in FIG. 8 of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  If there is an operation of “button to convert” in S208 (YES), similarly to the first embodiment, in S101, lock processing of deposit, ball lending, replay of stored balls, and card return is performed. Next, in S102 ', the display 124 displays the number of balls before conversion. In the pre-conversion ball number display, as shown in D102 ′ of FIG. 11, the fact that the deposit, the ball lending, the replay, and the card return that were locked in S101 cannot be performed is displayed, and the first before conversion is displayed. The number of stored 4-yen balls (for example, 3000 balls), which is the value of possession, is converted to the first display unit number (the number of 2000-dollar dollar boxes) converted by the predetermined display unit “2000 balls”, and the number before conversion. The second display unit number (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) converted from the predetermined display unit of “2000 balls” is displayed as the number of 1-yen stored balls (for example, 0 balls) that is the possession value of 2. The A portion where the converted value is less than 2000 balls is displayed in a dollar box smaller than the 2000 balls. Therefore, in this example, one dollar box of 2000 balls and one small dollar box representing 1000 balls are displayed as the first display unit number, and no dollar box is displayed as the second display unit number. Further, in the pre-conversion ball number display, the dollar box is displayed in white.

  Also, as buttons for accepting the setting of the conversion ball number, a “50 ball button” for converting the number of 4-yen storage of 50 balls and a “500 ball button” for converting the number of 4-yen storage of 500 balls are displayed. The The reason why the 50-ball button is provided is that if the number of 4-yen storage of the 50 balls is converted, the number of 1-yen storage of 200 balls can be replayed once, and the 500-ball button is provided. This is because, when the number of 4-yen stored balls of 500 balls is converted, the number of 1-yen stored balls of 2000 balls becomes 10 times, and the replay of the balls can be performed 10 times. Note that the number of balls set by these is not limited to 50 balls or 500 balls, and may be any number of balls, and as indicated by D102 in FIG. 9, "designated button" or "all buttons" May be provided. In S103 ', the operation of the "50 ball button" or "500 ball button" is waited for.

  If there is an operation of “50 ball button” or “500 ball button” in S103 ′ (YES), is the number of 4-yen storage balls stored in the storage table in S112 ′ equal to or greater than the specified number of balls? Determine whether or not. Even in the case of YES in S103 ′, it is the number specified by the button that does not perform the process of S105 in the first embodiment (determines whether or not the number of stored balls is within the upper limit range). If is 50 balls or 500 balls, the formula 0 is satisfied first, and the formula 1 or formula 2 is also satisfied.

  If it is determined in S112 'that the number of 4-yen storage balls is not greater than or equal to the specified number of balls (NO), a non-convertible display 2 similar to that in the first embodiment is displayed on the display 124 in S113. In S114, the operation of the “cancel button” is waited. When the operation of the “cancel button” is present (YES), the stored ball replay process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S112 'that the number of 4-yen storage balls is equal to or greater than the specified number (YES), the converted ball number display is displayed on the display 124 in S115'. In the post-conversion ball number display, as shown in D115 ′ of FIG. 11 (when the 500-ball button is operated), the number of 4-yen storage balls (2,500 balls in this example) that is the first possessed value after conversion is , The first display unit number (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) converted in “2000 balls” which is a predetermined display unit, and the 1-yen storage ball number which is the second property value after conversion (in this example) 2000 balls) is displayed as the second number of display units (the number of 2000 dollar dollar boxes) converted by the predetermined display unit “2000 balls”. In this example, one dollar box of 2000 balls and one dollar box of 500 balls are displayed as the first display unit number, and one dollar box of 2000 balls is displayed as the second display unit number. In the converted ball count display, the dollar box is displayed in black. In addition, an “execution button” for executing the conversion and the “stop button” are displayed. In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the “execute button” operation is waited in S116, and the “stop button” operation is waited in S117. If there is an operation of “Cancel button” in S117 (YES), the stored ball replay process is terminated.

  Although not shown, when the 50-ball button is operated instead of the 500-ball button, the first display in which the number of 4-yen stored balls (2950 balls in this example), which is the first property value after conversion, is converted. As a unit number, one dollar box of 2000 balls and one small dollar box representing 950 balls are displayed, and the number of 1-yen storage balls (200 balls in this example) which is the second property value after conversion is converted. A small dollar box representing 200 balls is displayed as the second display unit number.

  If there is an “execute button” operation in S116 (YES), as in the first embodiment, conversion is executed in S118, and a display during conversion is displayed on the display 124, as in the first embodiment. When the conversion is executed here, in the storage table shown in FIG. 5, (a) the number of 4-yen storage balls before conversion is 3000 balls and the number of 1-yen storage balls is 0, but the number of 4-yen storage balls after conversion is 2500 balls, 1 after conversion. The number of yen storage will be 2,000. At the same time, communication with the member management device 162 (transmission of a storage ball subtraction request and a storage ball addition request) is performed, and the same conversion (update of the storage ball DB) is performed also in the storage ball DB shown in FIG. And the conversion history is stored in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. In addition to the operation of the “execute button”, the conversion may be executed when a conversion instruction is received from the remote controller operated by the store clerk (that is, when the conversion operation is performed by the remote controller). In the display during conversion, as indicated by D118 in FIG. 11, the fact that conversion is in progress is displayed by blinking characters and arrows.

  In S119, the end of the conversion is waited. When the conversion is completed (YES), in S120 ′, the deposit, the ball lending, the replay of the stored ball, and the card return lock performed in S101 are released, and the conversion end display is performed. Is displayed on the display 124. In this conversion end display, as shown at D120 'in FIG. 11, the characters indicating that conversion has been completed and the converted first display unit number and second display unit number are displayed in the same manner as D115'. As in the first embodiment, in S121, the process waits for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and when the predetermined time elapses (YES), the process proceeds to S202.

  The CPU and the display 124 of the control unit 122 that performs the processing of S102, S109, and S115 in the first embodiment described above and performs the processing of S102 ′ and S115 ′ in the second embodiment are the first before conversion. The first display unit number (the number of dollar boxes of 2000 balls) in which the possession value (the number of 4-yen storage balls) is converted in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls), and the second owned value after conversion (1 yen storage ball) The number) functions as unit number display means for displaying the second display unit number (the number of 2000-dollar boxes) converted in the predetermined display unit. According to this, the first display unit number in which the first property value before conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit, and the second value in which the second property value after conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit. Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of other loan rates after conversion.

  In this example, when converting the first ownership value (number of 4-yen savings) to the second ownership value (number of 1-yen savings), the first and second property values before conversion are converted. The example in which the first display unit number and the converted first display value and the second display unit number converted from the second display value are described is not limited to this, but at least It is only necessary to display the first display unit number in which the first property value before conversion is converted and the second display unit number in which the second property value after conversion is converted. The second display unit number converted from the ownership value and the first display unit number converted from the first ownership value after conversion may not be displayed. In this example, the example in which the first display unit number before conversion and the second display unit number after conversion are displayed on separate screens has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display unit number may be displayed on the same screen.

  Further, in the unit number display, the display mode of the first display unit number (white dollar box) and the display mode of the second display unit number (black dollar box) are different, and thus the first property value before conversion. Or the second property value after conversion can be easily recognized. It should be noted that the display mode of the first display unit number and the display mode of the second display unit number only have to be different, and there is no particular limitation on how the display mode is different. For example, the display may be light and dark, light and shade, different in design and size before and after conversion, or one may be lit and the other blinked. Further, the display mode of the first display unit number and the display mode of the second display unit number may not be different.

  In addition, the CPU and display 124 of the control unit 122 that performs display during conversion in S118 function as specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (displaying that conversion is being performed by blinking characters and arrows) when conversion is performed. To do. This makes it easy to understand that the number of stored balls is being converted. Note that the specific effect is not particularly limited as long as it is executed when conversion is performed. For example, not only a display but also a specific effect by voice may be used.

  In addition, in FIGS. 7 and 10 described above, an example in which the number of balls at other loan rates can be converted into the number of balls at the current loan rate has been explained. It may be possible to convert to the number of stored balls at the lending rate. According to this, during the game in the ball lending unit 120 with a lending rate of 1 yen, the number of 1-yen stored balls is converted into the number of 4-yen stored balls. Can be prepared for the game.

  Next, creation of a total vote for conversion performed by the member management apparatus 162 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the conversion history tabulation process performed by the member management apparatus 162.

  First, in the conversion process (S400 in FIG. 6), the ball lending unit 120 transmits a storage ball subtraction request and a storage ball addition request to the member management device 162 in S120 of FIG. 7 or S120 ′ of FIG. Here, in the stored ball subtraction request, the member ID of the member card 103 accepted by the ball lending unit 120, the conversion time when the conversion process was performed, the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120, and the type of the number of stored balls of the conversion source (4 Yen or 1 Yen) and the number, and the accumulated ball addition request includes the member ID, the same conversion time, the same unit ID, and the type (1 Yen or 4 Yen) of the number of stored balls at the conversion destination and the number. In addition to the conversion time, the date, day of the week and the like on which the conversion process was performed are also included in the stored addition request and transmitted, and the date, day of the week are managed in the conversion history DB of the member management device 162. However, according to this, it is possible to grasp the number of conversion histories for each year or day of the week.

  When the member management device 162 receives the storage ball subtraction request, the member management device 162 stores the storage ball subtraction from the number of storage balls of the type included in the storage ball subtraction request stored in the storage ball DB in association with the card ID included in the storage ball subtraction request. When the number included in the request is subtracted and a storage ball addition request is received, the number of storage balls of the type included in the storage ball addition request stored in the storage ball DB in association with the card ID included in the storage ball addition request, The number included in the storage ball addition request is added.

  Further, when the member management device 162 receives the storage ball subtraction request and the storage ball addition request having the same member ID, conversion time, and unit ID in this way, the conversion processing is performed instead of the storage ball replay processing, the gift exchange processing, and the storage ball processing. In the conversion history DB, the member ID, the conversion time, the converted unit ID, and the type and number of the conversion source storage balls are stored in the conversion history DB. It should be noted that instead of the type and number of storage balls at the conversion source, the type and number of storage balls at the conversion destination included in the storage ball addition request may be stored.

  Next, the ball lending unit 120 transmits a storage ball subtraction request to the member management device 162 in S203 of FIG. 8 or 10 in the stored ball replay process (S500 of FIG. 6). Here, in the savings subtraction request, the membership ID of the membership card 103 accepted by the ball lending unit 120, the use time when the replay processing of the ball was performed, the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120, and the type of the number of used balls ( 4 yen or 1 yen) and the number.

  When the member management device 162 receives the storage ball subtraction request, the member management device 162 stores the storage ball subtraction from the number of storage balls of the type included in the storage ball subtraction request stored in the storage ball DB in association with the card ID included in the storage ball subtraction request. Subtract the number contained in the request. In addition, in the conversion history DB, the unit ID included in the storage ball subtraction request is associated with the member ID included in the storage ball subtraction request (when there is a plurality, the conversion time is the latest), and the game ID ( It is stored as the unit ID that has performed the replay process. Here, the “unit ID that played the game after conversion” is stored in the same way as the “converted unit ID” when the table is not moved, and the “converted unit ID” is stored when the table is moved. What is different from the “unit ID” is stored. From these unit IDs, the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 and the machine number, model name, and type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 are based on the table DB shown in FIG. It can be specified. When there are two types of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machine 1 and slot machine, the type of gaming machine can be specified from the unit ID.

  The conversion history DB stored in this way represents the following matters. The ball lending unit 120 can be converted not only to the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 but also to other lending rates.

  For example, in the first line shown in FIG. 12B, the member card 103 with the member ID K-00001 is accepted as a ball lending unit 120 with a unit ID U-00001 (lending rate is 4 yen). At time 10:36, the number of 4 yen stored balls associated with the member ID is converted into the number of 1 yen stored balls, and then the ball lending unit 120 with the unit ID U-00011 (the lending rate is 1 yen) ) Represents that a game has been performed (ie, the table has been moved). Therefore, this conversion was performed before moving the table to move from the ball lending unit 120 with a lending rate of 4 yen to another ball lending unit 120 with a lending rate of 1 yen. It is.

  The second row shows that the member card 103 with the member ID K-01234 is received by the ball lending unit 120 with the unit ID U-00012 (the loan rate is 1 yen) at 10:37. , The number of 4-yen stored balls associated with the member ID is converted into a 1-yen stored ball number, and thereafter, the game is performed in the ball lending unit 120 having the unit ID U-00012. . Therefore, this conversion is performed in order to continue playing with the ball lending unit 120 having a lending rate of 1 yen.

  The third line shows that the member card 103 with a member ID of K-26248 is received by a ball lending unit 120 with a unit ID of U-00021 (loan rate is 4 yen) at 10:40. The number of 1-yen stored balls associated with the member ID has been converted to the number of 4-yen stored balls. However, since the unit ID that played the game after the conversion is not stored, the return is unknown. However, since it has been converted into the number of 4-yen stored balls, which is the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120, there is a high possibility that this conversion has been performed in order to continue playing with the ball lending unit 120.

  Furthermore, the fourth line shows that the member card 103 with the member ID K-31049 is received by the ball lending unit 120 with the unit ID U-00013 (the loan rate is 1 yen) at 10:42. Then, the number of 1-yen stored balls associated with the member ID is converted into 4-yen stored-ball numbers, and thereafter, a game is performed with the ball lending unit 120 with a unit ID of U-00022 (lending rate is 4 yen). (That is, the table has been moved). Therefore, this conversion was performed before moving the table to move from the ball lending unit 120 with a lending rate of 1 yen to another ball lending unit 120 with a lending rate of 4 yen. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12B, the example in which the unit ID that first played the game (recycled ball replay) after conversion has been described as the “unit ID that played the game after conversion” has been described. The unit ID that has been played after the second time later may also be stored so that the converted game history can be traced.

  When the count form creation mode is activated in this member management device 162, the conversion history is totaled based on the conversion history DB, and is calculated for each card, for each unit, for each conversion rate, for each time zone. A vote, a game machine type total vote that has played a game after conversion, and a game machine type total vote that has been converted are created. Then, since the created total vote is output by a conversion history output means such as a display or a printer (that is, displayed on a display or printed on a printer), it can be confirmed whether or not conversion has been performed. The conversion history can be utilized for business in amusement halls.

  FIG. 14A shows an example of a card-by-card total vote. This total card count card can specify the history of conversion of the number of stored balls associated with the member ID of the member card 103 for each member card 103. From the conversion history DB, one member ID can be identified. All conversion histories are extracted and recorded, and the process is performed for all member IDs. In this card total card, the conversion time, the converted unit ID, the type and number of the number of storage balls of the conversion source, and the unit ID that played the game after conversion are associated with each of the plurality of member IDs. And the number of cases where the conversion process has been performed.

  According to this card total card, the conversion history for each member card 103 (that is, for each member ID and for each member) can be confirmed, so that the conversion history can be utilized for sales at a game arcade. For example, for a certain member, the converted unit ID and the unit ID that played the game after conversion are the same (that is, conversion for savings replay processing) and the number that is different (that is, conversion for moving the table) Can be grasped. Also, by looking at the number converted, it is possible to grasp whether the member has a tendency to convert more or less.

  In addition, based on the attribute information corresponding to each member ID (refer to the member attribute DB), the conversion history of all member IDs is re-aggregated for each gender and every age, so that the conversion tendency for every gender and every age (for example, , Males have more conversions than females, 20s have more conversions than other ages, etc.).

  FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating an example of a unit-by-unit total vote. This unit-by-unit total vote can specify the history of conversion performed according to the conversion operation for the ball lending unit 120 for each ball lending unit 120, and all the unit IDs from the conversion history DB The conversion history is extracted and recorded, and the process is performed for all unit IDs. In this unit totaling vote, in association with each of a plurality of unit IDs, the member ID, the conversion time, the type and number of storage balls at the conversion source, and the unit ID that played the game after conversion are the balls of the unit ID. Each conversion process performed by the lending unit 120 is shown, and the number of conversion processes performed is shown.

  According to this unit total vote, the conversion history for each of the ball lending units 120 (that is, for each unit ID) can be confirmed, so that the conversion history can be utilized for business in a game hall. For example, for a certain ball lending unit 120, the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120 and the unit ID that played the game after the conversion are the same (that is, conversion for the stored ball replay process), and the number is different (that is, the unit). It is possible to know the number of conversions for movement. Here, if the number of cases is the same, it can be grasped that the corresponding pachinko machine 110 is a model that is difficult to move, and if the number of different cases is large, it can be grasped that the corresponding pachinko machine 110 is a model that is easily moved. . Further, by looking at the number converted, it is possible to grasp whether the ball lending unit 120 has a tendency to convert more or less.

  In addition, based on the information of the pachinko machine 110 corresponding to each unit ID (refer to the base DB), the conversion history of all member IDs for each model and each type is re-aggregated, so that the conversion tendency for each model and each type (For example, model CR.AAA has more conversions than other models, MAX type has more conversions than other types, etc.).

  FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating an example of a conversion rate-based total vote. This conversion rate-by-conversion total form is converted from the first property value (4 yen in this example) to the second property value (1 yen in this example), and from the second property value to the first property value. The conversion history of the conversion source DB is all extracted and recorded from the conversion history DB, and the conversion history of the conversion source number of 4 yen storage balls is extracted and recorded. Is created by extracting and recording the entire conversion history of the number of 1-yen stored balls. In this conversion rate total form, the member ID, conversion time, converted unit ID, and conversion source storage ball are associated with each of the two conversion rates (ie, 4 yen → 1 yen, 1 yen → 4 yen). The number of the numbers and the unit ID that played the game after conversion are shown for each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 with the unit ID, and the number of conversion processes performed is shown.

  According to the total conversion rate total form, the conversion history for each loan rate can be confirmed, and the conversion history can be utilized for business in a game hall. For example, if there is a lot of conversion from 4 yen to 1 yen, you can play a game gently by using a 1-yen model with the savings you got with the 4-yen model (past savings or that day) The trend can be grasped, and conversely, if there is a lot of conversion from 1 yen to 4 yen, it is possible to grasp the tendency to aim for the first prize by using the storage balls obtained with the 1 yen model with the 4 yen model.

  FIG. 14 (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a total time slot count vote. The total time zone count slip can specify the conversion history for each time zone in which the conversion is performed (in this example, every hour such as 10:00 to 11:00). It is created by extracting and recording all conversion histories for one time zone from the history DB and performing the processing for all time zones. In this time zone counting vote, in association with each of a plurality of time zones, the member ID, the conversion time, the converted unit ID, the type and number of the number of storage balls of the conversion source, and the unit ID that performed the game after the conversion, Each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 with the unit ID is shown, and the number of conversion processes performed is shown.

  According to this time zone count slip, the conversion history for each time zone can be confirmed, so that the conversion history can be utilized for business in a game arcade. For example, if there are many conversions in the early hours, it is possible to grasp the tendency that there are many games by converting the stored balls acquired up to the previous day.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a total vote for each gaming machine type that has played a game after conversion. The total vote for each type of gaming machine that has played a game after the conversion can identify the type of the pachinko machine 110 that has played a game after the conversion. In this example, (a) machine type, (b) by type, (C) Three types of totalized votes for each rate are created.

  First, (a) for each conversion history stored in the conversion history DB, the model-specific total vote specifies the model corresponding to the “unit ID that played the game after conversion” based on the table DB, and the identification It is created by recording each conversion history for each model. In this type-specific tabulation, the member ID, the conversion time, the converted unit ID, the type and number of storage balls at the conversion source, and the unit ID that played the game after conversion are associated with each of a plurality of models. Each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 of the “unit ID that played a game after conversion” is shown, and the number of cases where the conversion process was performed is shown.

  According to this type-specific tabulation, the models of pachinko machines 110 that have played a game after conversion are aggregated and output, so the relationship between the conversion and the pachinko machines 110 that have played a game after the conversion is grasped. Can be used for business in amusement halls. For example, since a model with a large number of cases can be grasped as a popular model, sales measures such as increasing the number of the model can be taken.

  In addition, (b) the type-by-type total vote specifies, for each conversion history stored in the conversion history DB, the type corresponding to the “unit ID that played the game after conversion” based on the table DB, It is created by recording each conversion history for each type. In this type-by-type counting slip, the member ID, the conversion time, the converted unit ID, the type and number of storage balls of the conversion source, associated with each of a plurality of types (MAX type, sweet digital type, middle type), The unit ID that played the game after the conversion is shown for each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 of the “unit ID that played the game after conversion”, and the number of the conversion processes performed is shown. .

  According to this type-by-type count slip, the types of pachinko machines 110 that have played a game after conversion are totaled and output, so that the relationship between the conversion and the pachinko machines 110 that have played a game after the conversion is grasped. Can be used for business in amusement halls. For example, since a type with a large number of cases can be grasped as a popular type, sales measures such as increasing the type can be taken.

  Further, (c) the rate-by-rate total vote specifies the loan rate corresponding to the “unit ID that played the game after conversion” for each conversion history stored in the conversion history DB based on the table DB, It is created by recording each conversion history for each specified loan rate. In this rate-by-rate tabulation, a member ID, a conversion time, a converted unit ID, a type and number of storage balls at the conversion source, and after conversion are associated with each of a plurality of loan rates (4 yen, 1 yen). The unit ID that performed the game is shown for each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 of the “unit ID that played the game after conversion”, and the number of conversions performed is shown.

  According to this rate-by-rate tabulation, the loan rate of the ball lending unit 120 corresponding to the pachinko machine 110 that played the game after conversion is totaled and output, so the pachinko machine that played the conversion and the game after the conversion 110 can be grasped, and can be utilized for sales in a game arcade. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the loan rate with a large number of cases is a popular loan rate, it is possible to take a sales measure such as increasing the loan rate.

  In addition, in each count slip shown in FIG. 15, game data (for example, game time, game win / loss, etc.) in the pachinko machine 110 corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 of “unit ID that played the game after conversion” is also output. You may make it do. In this case, game data may be stored in the conversion history DB and the game data may be output, or game data stored in the hall computer 160 may be output.

  In addition, when a prize is exchanged at the prize exchange terminal after the conversion, the prize exchange is performed in place of “the unit ID that played the game after the conversion” in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. May be stored, and a tabulation stating that the prize has been exchanged after conversion may be created. In this case, it may be possible to specify whether or not the conversion is a batch conversion, and it is also possible to specify the exchanged prize in the tabulation slip.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of the total vote for each gaming machine type that has received the conversion. The total vote for each gaming machine type that has received this conversion can identify the type of the pachinko machine 110 (that is, the converted pachinko machine 110) corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation. In this example, Three types of tabulation forms are created: (a) model type, (b) type, and (c) rate.

  First, (a) for each type of conversion history stored in the conversion history DB, the model-specific total vote specifies a model corresponding to the “converted unit ID” based on the stand DB, and sets each model for each specified model. It is created by recording the conversion history. In this type-specific tabulation, a member ID, a conversion time, a converted unit ID, and a type and number of conversion-source stored ball numbers corresponding to each of a plurality of models are balls of the “converted unit ID”. Each conversion process performed by the lending unit 120 is shown, and the number of conversion processes performed is shown.

  According to this type-specific tabulation, the model of the pachinko machine 110 corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation is totaled and output, so the conversion and the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation are output. The relevance with the corresponding pachinko machine 110 can be grasped, and it can be utilized for business in a game hall. For example, a model with a large number of conversions to the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 (that is, conversion for replaying the stored ball) can be grasped as a popular model, so sales measures such as increasing the number of the model Can be taken.

  In addition, (b) the type-by-type total vote specifies, for each conversion history stored in the conversion history DB, a type corresponding to the “converted unit ID” based on the table DB, and for each specified type, It is created by recording the conversion history. In this type-by-type counting slip, the type and number of member ID, conversion time, converted unit ID, and number of stored balls of the conversion source are associated with each of a plurality of types (MAX type, sweet digital type, middle type). Is shown for each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 of the “converted unit ID”, and the number of cases where the conversion process has been performed is shown.

  According to this type-by-type counting slip, the type of pachinko machine 110 corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation is totaled and output, so the conversion and the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation are output. The relevance with the corresponding pachinko machine 110 can be grasped, and it can be utilized for business in a game hall. For example, since a type with a large number of conversions to the lending rate of the ball lending unit 120 (that is, conversion for replaying the stored ball) can be grasped as a popular type, sales measures such as increasing the type Can be taken.

  In addition, (c) the rate-by-rate tabulation specifies the loan rate corresponding to the “converted unit ID” for each conversion history stored in the conversion history DB based on the table DB, and the specified loan rate It is created by recording each conversion history separately. In this rate-by-rate tabulation, the member ID, the conversion time, the converted unit ID, and the type and number of storage balls of the conversion source are associated with each of a plurality of loan rates (4 yen, 1 yen). Each conversion process performed by the ball lending unit 120 of “converted unit ID” is shown, and the number of cases where the conversion process is performed is shown.

  According to this rate-by-rate counting slip, the rates of the pachinko machine 110 corresponding to the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation are totaled and output, so the conversion and the ball lending unit 120 that has received the conversion operation The relevance with the corresponding pachinko machine 110 can be grasped, and it can be utilized for business in a game hall. For example, since a loan rate with a large number of conversions to the loan rate of the ball lending unit 120 (that is, conversion for replaying the stored ball) can be grasped as a popular loan rate, the loan rate is increased. Can adopt the following sales measures.

  In addition, in each total vote shown in FIG. 16, the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120 that played a game before conversion may be output together. In this case, for example, in the member management device 162, the unit ID of the ball lending unit 120 in which the member card 103 has been received is stored in association with the member ID, and the member ID recorded on each counting slip is stored. The unit ID stored immediately before the converted unit ID may be output as the “unit ID that played the game before the conversion” among the unit IDs stored together.

  Here, when the ball lending unit 120 that has played a game before conversion is A, the converted unit ID is B, and the ball lending unit 120 that has played a game after conversion is C, A, B, and C are one. Only three, three may be different, or all three may be the same.

  Each tabulation shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is not limited to being output in the table format as shown, but may be output in a graph format. Each tabulation may be output in combination. For example, the tabulations shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 may be two or more of a certain model, a certain type, and a certain rate (for example, the model “CR. (AAA ”, type“ MAX ”, and rate“ 4 yen ”) may be narrowed down by unit IDs, or a specific“ converted unit ID ”may be used for a specific“ game after conversion ”. It may be narrowed down by “unit ID” (for example, converted by U-00001 and played a game by U-00011).

  Next, modified examples of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above will be described.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the pre-conversion ball number display (for example, D102 in FIG. 9) and the post-conversion ball number display (for example, the same D109), the first display unit number before conversion and the post-conversion The example in which the second display unit number is converted and displayed in the same display unit (2000 balls) has been described, but is not limited thereto, and the first display unit number before conversion and the second display unit after conversion The number may be converted and displayed in different display units. For example, when converting the number of 4-yen stored balls to the number of 1-yen stored balls, the number of stored balls after conversion is quadrupled, and the number of second display units may be too large for 2000 balls, so it may be difficult to see, for example, 10,000 balls. You may make it display the 2nd display unit number converted with the dollar box.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, in S101 of FIG. 7, an example in which all processes of deposit, ball lending, replay of stored balls, and card return are locked has been described. Only the process may be locked. Moreover, although the example which does not perform conversion was demonstrated during the process of money_receiving | payment, ball lending, and storage ball replay, you may not perform conversion only in the process of some of these.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in S105 of FIG. 7, an example has been described in which it is determined whether or not the number of stored balls is within the upper limit range, and conversion is permitted if within the upper limit range. However, it may be determined whether or not the number of stored balls after conversion is within a predetermined lower limit range, and if it is within the lower limit range, conversion may be permitted. For example, if the number of 4-yen stored balls is converted to 1-yen stored-balls, but the number of paid-outs of 1-yen stored-balls is less than 200 (in this example, 200 balls), it cannot be paid out even if converted, and the conversion is permitted. The conversion is not allowed because it is poor.

  In said 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, about the example which alert | reports the allowable number of balls | bowls in the conversion impossible display 1 shown to S106 of FIG. Although demonstrated, not only this but you may make it alert | report the number of allowable balls also in the conversion impossible display 3 shown to S108. Then, in these non-convertible indications 1 and 3, an “allowable ball number conversion button” may be displayed on the display 124, and when the button is operated, the allowable ball number may be converted.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, in S107 of FIG. 7, it is determined whether or not the upper limit 0 (for example, the number of 1-yen stored balls converted from the 4-yen stored-ball number does not exceed a specific value) is determined. After that, satisfy the upper limit 1 (the sum of the converted 4-yen and 1-yen balls does not exceed the specified value) or the upper limit 2 (the converted 1-yen balls do not exceed the specified value) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether the upper limit 1 or the upper limit 2 is satisfied without determining whether the upper limit 0 is satisfied.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, as illustrated in S109 and S115 of FIG. 7, the example in which the number of balls after conversion is displayed before S118 in which the conversion is actually performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In S109 and S115, the converted number of balls may not be displayed, and after the conversion is actually performed in S118, the converted number of balls may be displayed only in S120.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, when it is determined in S204 of FIG. 8 that there is an ownership value of another loan rate (in this example, the number of 4-yen coins), a conversion suggestion display is performed in S206. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the conversion suggestion display may be performed in S206 when it is determined in S204 that the possession value of other loan rates is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. Here, the predetermined number may be any number such that the number of 1-yen stored balls after conversion becomes 200 or more paid out by one replay process of stored balls, for example, if the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is 0 For example, if the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is 80, the predetermined number is 30. According to this, since the conversion suggestion display is not performed when the number of 4-yen storage balls to be converted is insufficient, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as shown in D102 of FIG. 9, D102 ′ of FIG. 11, etc., among the converted values obtained by converting the ownership value in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls in this example). The example in which the portion less than the display unit is expressed by a dollar box smaller than the dollar unit of the display unit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, in a dollar box having the same size as a 2000-dollar box, the amount of balls May be displayed so as to be less than 2000 balls, and in this case, it is preferable that the display of the amount of balls changes in proportion to the numerical value.

  In the second embodiment, the example in which the pachinko balls are paid out without a replay operation for storing balls when a predetermined time elapses in S121 in FIG. 10 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined in S121 in FIG. When the time elapses, the storage ball replay process may be temporarily terminated without performing the pachinko ball payout, and when the storage ball replay operation is performed again, the pachinko ball may be paid out.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, each time the conversion is performed in S120 of FIG. 7 or each time a pachinko ball is paid out in S203 of FIG. 8 or FIG. While the number of stored balls stored in the table is updated and the example in which the number of stored balls managed by the member management device 162 in the stored ball DB is updated by communicating with the member management device 162 has been described. The number of stored balls stored in the storage table is updated, but it does not communicate with the management device, and communicates with the member management device 162 in the card return process (that is, transmits the number of stored balls stored in the storage table). The member management device 162 may update the number of stored balls managed by the stored ball DB. According to this, the frequency | count of communication with the ball rental unit 120 and the member management apparatus 162 can be reduced.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the gaming device (ball lending unit 120) performs conversion processing, updates the number of stored balls stored in the stored ball table, and specifies that conversion has been performed. Although the example which updates the number of stored balls which this management apparatus is managing with storage ball DB was demonstrated by transmitting a possible signal with respect to a management apparatus (member management apparatus 162), it is not restricted to this, A game device May not store the number of stored balls (that is, does not have a stored ball table), and the management device may perform conversion processing and update the number of stored balls managed in the stored ball DB.

  In the stored ball replay process (FIG. 8) in this case, first, in S201, it is determined whether or not the number of 1-yen stored balls stored in the management device is 200 balls or more by communicating with the management device. If YES in S201, after performing the process of S202, in S203, 200 balls are subtracted from the number of 1-yen stored balls stored in the management device by communicating with the management device. On the other hand, if NO in S201, it is determined whether or not there is a 4-yen stored ball number stored in the management device by communicating with the management device, and the processing in S205 and subsequent steps is performed.

  In the conversion process in this case (FIG. 7), after performing the process of S101, in S102, by communicating with the management apparatus, the number of stored balls stored in the management apparatus (the number of 4-yen stored balls and 1 The number of balls before conversion based on the number of yen storage balls) is displayed. Next, the determination of S105 or S112 is performed by the management apparatus by communicating with the management apparatus, and the ball lending unit 120 displays S106, S109, S113, and S115 based on the determination result. In S118, the ball lending unit 120 does not perform conversion, and in S120, by communicating with the management device, the stored value subtraction request for the first property value and the accumulated value addition request for the second property value are transmitted. Then, the number of stored balls stored in the management device is updated.

  Next, although 3rd-5th embodiment is described, this invention is made | formed with the following meaning.

  In stores where pachinko machines and slot machines, which are a type of gaming machine, are installed, a counter for displaying the number of possessed balls and medals of a player playing with the gaming machine corresponding to these gaming machines. A gaming device such as a machine or a card unit is installed.

  As an invention relating to such a gaming apparatus, Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-249650) describes the number of balls held by a player who plays with a pachinko machine, and each pachinko machine according to the number of balls held. A technique for displaying a ball box corresponding to the number of balls as a predetermined image on the display unit of the partition unit that partitions the ball is disclosed. Further, in Document 2 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-42799), a dollar box is displayed as a predetermined image in a different number or color on the display unit of the card unit according to the number of balls acquired by a player playing with a pachinko machine. Techniques to do this are disclosed.

  In a gaming apparatus that performs display according to the number of game media possessed by a player as disclosed in Documents 1 and 2, the possessed game is a condition for displaying a predetermined image such as a ball box or dollar box on the display unit. Generally, a threshold value for the number of media is set, and when the number of possessed game media reaches this threshold value, a predetermined image is generally displayed. In addition, after displaying a predetermined image on the display unit, the number of game media possessed by the player decreases with the game, and when the value falls below the above threshold, the display of the predetermined image is generally erased.

  In this case, since the threshold for displaying the predetermined image is the same as the threshold for non-displaying the predetermined image, the display / display of the predetermined image is repeated when the number of possessed game media repeatedly increases and decreases immediately before the threshold. The non-display is frequently switched. For this reason, there is a problem that switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image is very troublesome for a player who checks the number of game media possessed by viewing the predetermined image displayed on the display unit.

  The inventions according to the third to fifth embodiments have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and the purpose thereof is intuitively easy to understand indicating the number of game media possessed by a player playing a game machine. An object of the present invention is to propose a new method for preventing display / non-display of a predetermined image from being frequently switched by increasing / decreasing the number of possessed game media just before a threshold while enabling display.

  The “conversion” described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment is also applied to the fourth embodiment, and not only conversion of the number of stored balls but also conversion of the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) is performed. .

  Further, the “creation of counting votes” (FIGS. 13 to 16) described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment is also applied to the fourth embodiment, and conversion of the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) is performed. If it is done, the conversion history is tabulated. Specifically, the conversion time and the converted unit are associated with the card ID of the visitor card instead of the member ID of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, as in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. The ID, the type and number of possession balls of the conversion source, and the unit ID characterized by the game after conversion are tabulated.

  Here, when counting the conversion history of the number of possessed balls corresponding to the visitor card, it is possible to specify when the visitor card is collected in the card unit with the remaining prepaid amount and the counted number of balls, and one collection It is preferable that the conversion histories between one and the next collection are tabulated. This is because the collection is considered an opportunity to change the owner of the visitor card. Specifically, for example, when a visitor card is collected, the card ID of the visitor card is transmitted from the card unit to the possession management computer 8 and stored in the visitor card management data of the possession management computer 8. 14 is created by storing a collection flag in association with the card ID (the card ID with the latest conversion time when a plurality of cards are stored). In such a case, the conversion history from one collection flag to immediately before the next collection flag (or to the end if there is no next collection flag) may be aggregated.

[3. Third Embodiment]
[3-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a third gaming system 1A in the third embodiment. The third gaming system 1A is a type of a plurality of pachinko machines 2 that are a type of gaming machine installed on a game island (not shown), and a gaming device and an information display device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2. A certain data display device 4, an inter-unit counting unit 5 which is a kind of gaming device and counting device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, a hall computer 6 which is a kind of control device and management device, and a control device And a ball management computer 8 which is a kind of management device.

  Each pachinko machine 2 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and each pachinko machine 2, data display device 4, and inter-counter counting unit 5 has a hall computer 6 and a ball management computer 8 via a machine terminal. It is connected to the. In FIG. 17, for the sake of simplicity, four pachinko machines 2 installed on the amusement island are illustrated.

  Information display for displaying various information such as game information related to games on the pachinko machine 2 and store information related to store sales, at a predetermined position above each pachinko machine 2 installed on the amusement island A data display device 4 which is a kind of device is installed. As will be described later, the data display device 4 has two display units, a first display unit 430 and a second display unit 440, and displays different data in the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. . Since the data display device 4 is a terminal that discloses information to a player or a player, it can also be referred to as an information disclosure terminal.

  In the present embodiment, the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 is configured to include the touch panel 421, and the call icon, menu icon, and version information icon displayed on the first display unit 430 are displayed on the player. By tapping, it is possible to call a store clerk, select a menu (wagon service, hand towel, meal break, etc.), and instruct to display the version information of the pachinko machine 2. Therefore, the data display device 4 can be rephrased as a calling lamp device.

  The inter-unit counting unit 5 is provided adjacent to the left side (or right side) of each pachinko machine, and counts the number of pachinko balls paid out to the lower plate of the pachinko machine 2. At the lowermost position of the inter-counter counting unit 5, a counting payout unit 380, which will be described in detail later, is provided. The count payout unit 380 has a function of counting and taking pachinko balls, storing the counted pachinko balls, and returning a predetermined number of pachinko balls to the player according to a player's payout operation of the pachinko balls. Have.

  The hall computer 6 comprehensively manages the game information of each pachinko machine 2 installed in the store, manages the data display device 4 provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, and controls each data display device 4 Settings related to display on the display units (first display unit 430 and second display unit 440) (setting of display contents, display conditions, display mode, etc.) are performed.

  The possession management computer 8 manages the counted number of balls counted by the inter-unit counting unit 5 and manages the number of possessions recorded on the possession card that the player can use for replaying. .

  In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to an ordinary pachinko machine 2 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. However, as will be described later in other embodiments, the gaming machine is an ordinary pachinko machine. It is not limited to 2 and may be a sealed pachinko machine. Also, the gaming machine can be a slot machine.

[3-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of information and signals between the devices of the third gaming system 1A.

  From the pachinko machine 2, signals relating to the game such as a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a short time signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal are output to the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6.

  The jackpot signal is a signal that is output during the jackpot state, the probability changing signal is a signal that is output only during the probability changing state, and the short / medium signal is a period of the shortest state. It is a signal that is output only inside. The start signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output when all the display results of the special figure variable display section are derived and displayed and the variable display is completed. The prize ball signal is a predetermined ball number (for example, 10 balls). ) Is a pulse signal of a predetermined width that is output each time it is paid out. These signals are examples of game signals output from the gaming machine. These signals will be described later in detail.

  From the inter-unit counting unit 5, a possessed ball signal indicating the number of possessed balls of the player counted by the counting payout unit 380 is output to the data display device 4. In this embodiment, the inter-counter counting unit 5 is configured to output a possessed ball signal to the data display device 4 at intermittent timing. Here, the intermittent timing in the present embodiment is not an arbitrary (real-time) timing, for example, a timing at a predetermined time interval, a timing at which the count result of the visitor card unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, a visitor This is the timing when the count is confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the card unit 380 has run out of count, and the determination is awaited.

  The inter-counter counting unit 5 stores, for example, the possessed ball signal at a timing every predetermined time interval (for example, 10 seconds) or every time the count number of the counting payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25 balls). Output to the display device 4. The possessed ball signal is an example of a signal that can specify the number of game media possessed by a player who plays with a gaming machine.

  In addition, a card discharge signal indicating that the ball card has been discharged is output from the inter-counter counting unit 5 to the data display device 4. Further, from the inter-unit counting unit 5, the possession card information including the number of possessions of the player is output to the possession management computer 8.

  From the hall computer 6, display setting data, which is setting data for display on the display unit (the first display unit 420 and the second display unit 430) of the data display device 4, or a specific display on the display unit. The display instruction signal is output to the data display device 4.

[3-3. Configuration of pachinko machine]
FIG. 19 is a front view showing an example of an external configuration of the pachinko machine 2 in the present embodiment.
The pachinko machine 2 includes a glass door frame 22 formed in a frame shape, and includes a hitting ball supply tray 23 on a lower surface of the glass door frame 22. An operation unit 14 is provided at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 23, and a lower plate 24 that stores pachinko balls overflowing from the hitting ball supply tray 23 at a lower portion of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 23, A hitting operation handle (hereinafter referred to as a hitting operation knob) 25 for emitting a hitting ball is provided.

  A game board 26 is detachably attached to the rear side of the glass door frame 22. A game area 27 is provided in front of the game board 26. A special figure variable display unit 28 variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information called “special symbols” is provided in the lower area on the right side toward the game area 27.

  Further, in the central portion of the game area 27, a plurality of types of identification information called “effect symbols” are variably displayed and an effect variable display portion 29 where effect images are displayed, and a plurality of types of “normal symbols”. There is provided a variable display device 30 in which identification information is variably displayed. The game board 26 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 44, a passing gate 31, a starting winning hole 34, and a variable winning ball device 36. An out port 46 for collecting the water is formed.

  When a hit ball is won at each of these winning openings (that is, the grant condition is satisfied), a winning ball corresponding to each winning opening is paid out by a ball cutting / dispensing device (not shown) and paid by the ball cutting / dispensing device. A prize ball signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) is output to the outside according to the number of awarded balls (grant number), and the number of prize balls is notified to the outside.

  Further, the number of hitting balls won in each winning opening and the number of hitting balls collected in the out slot 46 are counted by an out ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2, and the counted hitting balls are counted. By outputting an impact ball signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) according to the number of impact balls, the number of impact balls is notified to the outside.

  A hit ball fired by a hammer (not shown) that is swung by the operation of the hitting operation knob 25 enters the game area 27 through the hitting rail, and then flows down the game area 27. At this time, the pachinko balls whose launch momentum is too weak to reach the game area 27 are circulated to the lower plate 24 through a circulation path (not shown).

In addition, when the ball that has been driven into the game area 27 passes through the passing gate 31, the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 30 is variably started.
When the display result after the variable display operation of the variable display device 30 becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, ◯), the movable piece 35 provided in the start winning opening 34 is opened for a predetermined time, and is for the player. This is an advantageous state.

  When a pachinko ball is won in the start winning opening 34, all special symbols start variable display (variable display) in the special figure variable display section 28, and the effect display starts in the effect display section 29. After that, when the special symbol in the special figure variable display unit 28 is stopped and the stop display result is a specific display mode determined in advance, the left, middle and right effect symbols in the effect display unit 29 are displayed. The variable display is also stopped. And the display mode of the effect symbol is also set to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, 777), so that a specific gaming state (a big hit state) is generated and a big hit signal is output. , The occurrence of the jackpot is notified to the outside.

  Further, when the special symbol on the special symbol variable display unit 28 is stopped, a start signal having a predetermined pulse width is output, and the special symbol variable display (variable display) is performed on the special symbol variable display unit 28. Will be notified.

  When the big hit state occurs in this way, the opening / closing plate 40 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 36 is opened, and a first state advantageous to the player is obtained. This first state ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 10) wins, whichever comes first, and then for the player This is a disadvantageous second state.

  If a hit ball that has entered the large winning opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 36 in the first state wins a specific winning area (V pocket) and is detected by a V count switch (not shown), Repeat continuation control is performed in which the second state is controlled to the first state after the end of the first state. The upper limit number of the repeated continuation control is set to 15 times, for example.

  The first state from the second state (the state where the big prize opening is closed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for the variable winning ball device 36 in which the specific winning area (V pocket) is not provided. You may make it perform the repetition continuation control controlled to (a state where the big prize opening is opened). The first state ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls, whichever comes first, is satisfied. The number of executions of repeated continuation control for controlling the variable winning ball device 36 from the second state to the first state is set to be different depending on, for example, the types of a plurality of specific gaming states (big hit gaming states). In other cases, the number of executions of the repeated continuation control 15 is called a big hit of 15 rounds, and the number of executions of the repeated continuation control 2 times is called a big hit of 2 rounds.

  Even when a hitting ball is won in the big winning opening (that is, the grant condition is satisfied), the winning ball corresponding to the winning is paid out by a ball cutting and discharging device (not shown) and also paid out by the ball cutting and discharging device. The award ball signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) is output to the outside according to the number of award balls (the number of balls awarded), and the number of award balls is notified to the outside.

  When the display result of the special figure variable display part and the effect symbol display result of the effect variable display part are stopped and displayed in a combination of predetermined jackpot symbols, a big hit is generated as described above, but the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. A reach state may occur in a state before being performed.

  When the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol variable display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29 and the production symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined probability variation symbol type, After the completion of the big hit, the probability variation state in which the probability of a big hit again becomes a higher probability state than the normal probability state becomes a probability variation state. This is called “big hit”, and during the probability variation state after the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state signal is set to the output state, so that the occurrence of the probability variation state is notified to the outside.

  When the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol variable display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29 and the production symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols other than the predetermined probability variation symbols, ”Until the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times in the special figure variable display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29, or until the next big hit occurs, the special symbol and the production in the special figure variable display unit 28. The variable display portion 29 has a variable display time (fluctuation time) in which the variable display time (variable time) is shortened compared to the normal gaming state, and the short-and-medium signal is output in these short-time states. Thus, the occurrence of the short time state is notified to the outside.

  The pachinko machine 2 of this embodiment is equipped with an information output board (not shown) for outputting these signals to the outside, and the information output board, the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6 are connected to a signal cable (not shown). The information output board is connected to the data display device 4 and the hall through the signal cable through the signal cable, and an external output signal consisting of a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a time reduction signal, a start signal, and a prize ball signal. It is output to the computer 6.

  The big hit medium signal is a signal indicating that a big hit has occurred and also a signal indicating that the big hit is being controlled. During the period in which the jackpot state is controlled, control is performed so that the jackpot signal is in the ON state, and during the period in which the jackpot state is not controlled, the jackpot signal is in the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to specify that a big hit has occurred in the gaming device connected to the pachinko machine 2, such as the data display device 4 or the hall computer 6, and that the big hit state is controlled.

  The probability changing signal is a signal indicating that the probability that the big hit occurs is controlled to the probability changing state (high probability state) in which the ratio is higher than the normal state (low probability state). During the period in which the probability variation state is controlled, control is performed so that the probability variation signal is in the ON state, and during the period not controlled in the probability variation state, the probability variation signal is in the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to specify that the game device connected to the pachinko machine 2 such as the data display device 4 or the hall computer 6 is controlled to be in a probable variation state. Also, when the probability change state is controlled with the end of the big hit state, it is possible to identify with these gaming devices that the probability big hit has occurred. In addition, when the jackpot state is not controlled to be in a probable variation state, it is possible to specify that a big jackpot has occurred normally with these gaming devices. As a result, the number of occurrences of jackpots and the breakdown of probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots can be tabulated on the gaming device side.

  The short time signal is a signal indicating that the short time state is controlled to shorten the variable display time of the variable display device. During the period controlled to the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is turned on, and during the period not controlled to the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to specify that the game device connected to the pachinko machine 2 such as the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6 is controlled in the time-saving state.

  Further, when the probability change state is controlled with the end of the big hit state, but not in the short time state, it is possible to specify that the latent probability change big hit has occurred with these gaming devices. Here, the latent probability variation big hit is a big hit whose opening pattern of the big winning opening is common with the small hit and is controlled to the probability changing state (high probability state) after the big hit state ends. Note that the small win is a control mode in which the game state does not change after the completion of the opening control of the big winning opening although the big winning opening is opened in a specific opening pattern (for example, 0.5 seconds is opened twice). Say. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to specify whether a small hit or a latent probability change big hit has occurred if the big winning opening is opened with a specific opening pattern. On the other hand, in the gaming apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 2, it is possible to identify the latent probability changing state that is difficult for the player to grasp based on the fact that the player is not in the short-time state despite being in the probability changing state.

  The pachinko machine 2 of the present embodiment has a control for counting and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on a prize ball signal output based on a prize from a game control board that controls the game in the pachinko machine 2. And a prize ball control board (not shown) for performing control for counting and lending 25 pachinko balls as payout units based on the number of balls possessed by the player counted by the inter-unit counting unit 5 It is possible to rent pachinko balls that are multiples of 25 balls, which is the payout unit.

  The pachinko machine exemplified in the present embodiment has variable display means (for example, special figure variable) for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) that can identify each. The display unit 28 and the effect display unit 29) are provided, and when a predetermined specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display means, control is made to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Then, after the specific gaming state is completed, the gaming state is an example of a gaming machine that controls the gaming state to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display means becomes the specific display result is higher than the normal state or the normal state.

In addition, the pachinko machine exemplified in the present embodiment is a variable display device (for example, a special display) that displays and displays a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) that can be identified. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the figure variable display unit 28 and the effect display unit 29) becomes a predetermined specific display result, the first state (open state) advantageous to the player and the player A gaming machine that changes a variable winning means (a special variable winning ball device that switches a large winning opening to an open state or a closed state) to a first state that can be changed to any one of a disadvantageous second state (closed state). There,
First gaming state control means for controlling to a first gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period of time a predetermined number of times (for example, a big hit gaming state in which a maximum of 30 seconds is released 15 times);
A second game state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and a number less than the predetermined number of times (for example, a big hit game in which a maximum of 0.5 seconds is released twice) After executing the state (a big hit state associated with the latent probability change big hit)), the second game which controls the gaming state to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than the normal state. State control means;
After executing a third gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state in which a maximum of 0.5 seconds is released twice) in which the variable winning means is changed in the same manner as the second gaming state, the variable winning means is changed to the first gaming state. A third gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state before the state is changed;
Deciding whether to control to the first gaming state, whether to control to the second gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display Pre-determining means to
It is an example of a gaming machine provided with effect state control means for controlling to a specific effect state that is the same effect mode after being controlled to the second game state and after being controlled to the third game state.

  In such a gaming machine, when the latent probability change big hit occurs and when the small hit occurs, the opening pattern of the big prize opening is common and the production mode is also common, so the player has a latent probability change big hit. It is difficult to grasp whether it has occurred or a small hit has occurred.

In addition, the pachinko machine exemplified in this embodiment is
A player plays a game by launching a game medium into the game area,
A variable winning device (movable piece 35) that is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win, and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to win. (So-called electric tulips))
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area (passage gate 31) provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information (ordinary symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. Normal identification information variable display control means for performing control for deriving and displaying the display result on the normal identification information variable display device (variable display device 30);
A variable for performing control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device becoming a predetermined display result (lighting state of LED indicating winning). Winning device control means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition (for example, the end of a big hit gaming state of a big hit type with a high base state (for example, a big hit type other than the latent probability variation big hit)) is established, the ratio of the variable winning device to be in an advantageous state is low It is an example of a gaming machine provided with a high base state control means for controlling from a base state (normal state: low base state) to a high base state with a high ratio of making the variable winning device advantageous.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when a latent probability change big hit occurs in a low base state, a high probability low base state occurs after the big hit gaming state ends, and when a small hit occurs, the low hit state after the small hit gaming state ends. Since the player is in the low probability base state, if the player is controlled to the low base state after the completion of the opening control of the big prize opening, whether the latent probability change big hit has occurred (whether the player is controlled to the high probability low base state) or It is difficult to grasp whether a small hit has occurred (whether it is controlled to a low probability low base state).

  Note that the output paths of the symbol determination signal, the big hit signal, the short time medium signal, and the probability changing signal are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment. Any of these signals may be output from the main control board. For example, variable display means (for example, a special symbol display) is connected to the main control board for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) that can be identified. When a specific display result (big hit symbol) predetermined on the variable display means is derived and displayed, control is performed to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Then, after the end of the specific gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display means becomes the specific display result is higher than that in the normal state or the normal state. The main control board outputs a symbol determination signal every time variable display is executed by the variable display means, and outputs a big hit signal when controlled to a specific gaming state, and is controlled to a high probability state. If it is, the signal during probability change is output, and if it is controlled to the high base state, the signal during time reduction is output.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when a latent probability change big hit occurs in a low probability low base state, the signal during probability change is displayed after the big hit gaming state ends (after the big winning opening is opened twice for a maximum of 0.5 seconds). ON, the short / medium signal is OFF, and if a small hit occurs in the same low probability low base state, it is definitely changing after the small hit gaming state is over (after the big winning opening is opened twice in a maximum of 0.5 seconds) The signal is OFF, and the hour / medium signal is OFF. Therefore, in an external device such as a data display device to which a signal is input, it is possible to determine whether or not the latent probability changing state (probability changing signal ON, time reduction medium signal OFF) is based on the probability changing signal and the time reduction medium signal. ing.

  Note that the pachinko machine 2 in the present embodiment may be an encapsulated ball pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as an “enclosed pachinko machine”) 2B, which will be described later, instead of the normal pachinko machine 2. In the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, pachinko balls are enclosed inside, and when the player operates the batting operation handle, the firing motor of the launching device is driven to drive the encapsulated balls one by one into the game area. It is configured as follows. Pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area will win at any of the winning openings or be collected at the out opening without winning. The pachinko balls that have won at any one of the winning holes and the pachinko balls that have been collected at the out mouth are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the gaming machine. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is hit again into the game area.

  Although details will be described later, in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the player plays a game by holding points. Specifically, every time a shot ball is detected by the shot ball detector provided in the launch device, the score is subtracted, and every time a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detector, the score is added. So, update your score from time to time. In addition, when a game ball wins a winning opening, the score is updated as needed by adding a score corresponding to the winning to the winning opening.

  When the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B is applied to the present embodiment, the player's points may be handled as the number of possessed game media and the possessed ball special display described later may be performed. Specifically, thresholds for the player's current points (first display threshold, first non-display threshold, second display threshold, and second non-display threshold) are determined, and threshold determination for the player's points is determined. Then, the same display control and non-display control as in the above embodiment may be performed to display / hide the predetermined image on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4.

[3-4. Configuration of inter-unit counting unit]
FIG. 19 is a front view showing an example of the external configuration of the inter-counter counting unit 5, and FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the functional configuration of the inter-unit counting unit 5.
As shown in FIG. 19, an operation button 550 including a ticket issuing button 551 and a payout button 552 and a card insertion slot 560 for a player to insert / remove a ball card are provided on the front face of the inter-unit counting unit 5. It has been.

  When the player presses the ticketing button 551, a possession card recording the number of possessed balls (the number of possessions) of the player at that time is issued from the card insertion slot 560. Further, when the player presses the payout button 552, a predetermined number of unit balls among the number of possessed balls are paid back to the pachinko machine 2, and the player can play a game using the paid-up pachinko balls. Become. In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the loan rate is 4 yen, and the number of unit balls repaid to the player by one payout operation will be described as 125.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the card insertion slot 560 is connected to a ball card reader / writer (R / W) 570 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 560. The record information of the card ID and the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) recorded on the possessed card inserted from the card insertion slot 560 is read and written.

  Further, a control unit 505 for controlling the operation of the inter-counter counting unit 5 is provided at a substantially central position of the inter-unit counting unit 5 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the inter-unit counting unit 5. Various operations of the inter-counter counting unit 5 are controlled by the control unit 505.

  Further, at the lowermost position of the inter-unit counting unit 5, the pachinko balls are counted and taken in, and the counted pachinko balls are the maximum fraction, that is, less than 25 units which are the payout unit in the corresponding pachinko machine 2. A counting payout unit 380 is provided that stores only 24 pieces, which is the maximum value of fractions, and counts pachinko balls with fractions less than the unit. Hereinafter, “fraction less than unit” is referred to as “fraction”.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the counting and paying unit 380 is connected to a connection box 340 in the form of a horizontally long box disposed between the lower plate 24 of the pachinko machine 2 and the repair board of the game island. It has become.

  The connection box 340 is formed on the terminal side of the connection box 340 and has a relatively large height box (not shown) in the height direction, and a relatively small thickness in the height direction. It is comprised from the path | route box (not shown) formed so that a connection part may be connected.

  The connection box 340 is connected to the counting / dispensing unit 380 so that the terminal box is positioned below the lower plate 24. Pachinko balls discharged from the lower plate 24 are placed on the upper surface of the terminal box. A feeding portion 345 having a hopper shape is formed. Also, at the lower front position of the terminal box, there is an open / close shutter that can be opened and closed by the player and is normally energized so as to be closed, and the fraction paid back (returned) from the counting payout unit 380 A return port 342 through which the pachinko balls are discharged is provided.

  In addition, the upper position in the path box is provided so as to incline toward the counting / dispensing unit 380, and the two flow paths that guide the pachinko balls introduced into the inserting portion 345 to the counting / dispensing unit 380 under natural flow. A counting passage 343 composed of a passage is provided. A return passage 344 is provided below the counting passage 343 so as to incline toward the return opening 342 and guides the pachinko balls paid out from the counting discharge unit 380 to the return opening 342 in a natural flow. Yes.

  A counting lever 341 is provided at the upper front position of the terminal box 340a. The counting lever 341 is slidable by the player. By sliding the counting lever 341 against the biasing force, the insertion portion 345 is provided. The opening / closing shutter 346 provided at the entrance to the counting passage 343 is opened.

  The count dispensing unit 380 to which the connection box 340 is connected is connected to the counting passage 343 and is provided so as to incline from the front side of the inter-unit counting unit 5 toward the inner side of the inter-unit counting unit 5. A counting sensor (not shown) that detects and counts pachinko balls flowing down the inflow path is provided for each flow path at the end position of the inflow path. Pachinko balls that have flowed into the counting and dispensing unit 380 through the passage 343 are detected and counted by the counting sensor. When counted by the counting sensor, a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the count dispensing unit 380 to the control unit 505 in response to the detection of one pachinko ball. Each time the detection signal is input, the control unit 505 increments the stored number of possessed balls by one.

  When the number of balls possessed by the player increases, pachinko balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 flow into the counting passage 343 from the lower plate 24 as needed by keeping the player pulling the counting lever 341. In the case where the number is increased at any time by being counted by the counting payout unit 380, the pachinko ball discharged from the pachinko machine 2 is kept in the lower plate without the player pulling the counting lever 341. There are two cases where the pachinko balls that have been accumulated flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke by pulling the counting lever 341 when the balls have accumulated, and increase at a stroke by being counted by the counting dispensing unit 380.

  Further, when the number of balls possessed by the player decreases, the pachinko ball is refunded to the player by the player's refund operation, and as described above, the number of refunds by one refund operation is 125 shots. The number of possessed balls decreases by 125 by one refund operation. The control unit 505 subtracts 125 from the stored number of possessed balls every time a refund operation is performed. However, if a refund operation is performed when the number of possessed balls is less than 125, the number of possessed balls is set to zero. That is, the number of balls corresponding to the stored number of possessed balls is subtracted.

  Further, the inter-counter counting unit 5 and the pachinko machine 2 are configured to be able to send and receive lending-related signals associated with lending a plurality of pachinko balls predetermined as payout units. The lending-related signal includes a lending request signal for causing the pachinko machine 2 to lend gaming balls from the inter-counter counting unit 5, a terminal terminal lending completion signal output from the pachinko machine 2, a stand READY signal, and an inter-counter count. Signals such as a unit READY signal and a terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal are included. In addition, from the pachinko machine 2, game signals such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a short-time signal, a winning ball signal, a start signal, and a driving ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 It is comprised so that reception can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the inter-counter counting unit 5 includes a control unit 505, operation buttons 550, a ball card insertion / ejection unit 565, a ball card R / W 570, a count payout unit 380, and a communication unit. 590.

  The control unit 505 is a volatile device capable of storing card information 531 such as the number of possessed balls recorded on the ball card being received, and a CPU 510 which is a kind of control device, a ROM 520 which is a type of nonvolatile storage device. RAM 530 which is a kind of storage device, and an RTC 540 capable of outputting time information, calendar information, and the like. The RAM 530 is backed up by a battery (not shown) and retains data stored for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off.

  The ROM 520 stores an inter-counter counting unit processing program 521 that is read by the CPU 510 and executed as inter-unit counting unit processing (see FIG. 39). The inter-counter counting unit process will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  In the card information 531 stored in the RAM 530, information such as the possessed card ID and the number of possessed balls (number of possessed balls) of the player is recorded.

  The communication unit 590 is a communication device for transmitting / receiving data and transmitting / receiving signals to / from the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The communication unit 590 transmits a possessed ball signal indicating the possessed ball of the player to the data display device 4 under the control of the CPU 510.

[3-5. Functional configuration of hall computer]
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the hall computer 6.
The hall computer 6 includes a CPU 610, an input device 620, a display 625, a speaker 630, a clock device 635, a first communication unit 640, a second communication unit 650, a ROM 670, a hard disk 680, and a RAM 690. And a computer system in which each unit is connected via a bus.

  The CPU 610 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each unit of the hall computer 6 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 670. In the present embodiment, the CPU 610 includes a display content setting unit 611 and a game totaling unit 612 as main functional units.

  The input device 620 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the CPU 610. In response to an operation input from the input device 620, an instruction operation such as editing of data in various databases stored in the hard disk 680 is performed.

  The display 625 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the CPU 610, and includes an LCD or the like. The display 625 displays data contents of various databases stored in the hard disk 680.

  The speaker 630 is a sound output device that outputs various sounds based on a sound output control signal output from the CPU 610. From the speaker 630, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying the administrator when a warning is issued or when an abnormality occurs is output.

  The timepiece device 635 is an internal timepiece provided in the hall computer 6 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including the date) of the clock device 635 is output to the CPU 610.

  The first communication unit 640 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 2, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 640 receives from the pachinko machine 2 game signals such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a short time signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal. In addition to these game signals, a safe signal indicating the number of safe balls or an out ball signal indicating the number of out balls may be received.

  The second communication unit 650 is a communication device for performing communication with the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. Under the control of the CPU 610, the second communication unit 650 transmits display setting data 691 and a simultaneous effect display instruction signal to the data display device 4.

  The ROM 670 is a read-only nonvolatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program for the hall computer 6. In the present embodiment, the ROM 670 stores a management program 671 that is read by the CPU 610 and executed as a management process (see FIGS. 32 and 33). The management program 671 includes a display content setting program 671a executed as display content setting processing (see FIG. 34) as a subroutine. These processes will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  The hall computer 61A may be configured not to include the ROM 670 as a storage device. In this case, the various programs described above may be stored in, for example, the hard disk 680.

  The hard disk 680 is a readable / writable nonvolatile storage device, and stores various data related to display settings of the data display device 4 and various databases related to games in the pachinko machine 2. Specifically, a display table 681, a simultaneous effect display table 682, a display pattern table 683, and a game total database 684 are stored.

  The display table 681 is a table related to the setting of display contents of the data display device 4, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. The display table 681 stores a pachinko machine ID, a model name, a display type, and display contents in association with each other.

The pachinko machine ID is a number (ID) for uniquely identifying each pachinko machine 2 and is assigned to each pachinko machine 2 individually.
The model name is the model name of the pachinko machine 2 with the pachinko machine ID.
The display type is a display type of the data display device 4, and in this embodiment, two types of “normal” and “simultaneous effect” are defined.
The display content is the display content to be displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4, and the display content of the first display unit 430 and the display content of the second display unit 440 are individually determined.

  Specifically, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 having the pachinko machine IDs P1 to P20 is “pachinko XXX”. The display contents of the first display unit 430 in the normal state include (1) pachinko machine model name, (2) start count, (3) big hit count, (4) probability variation big hit count, (5) normal big hit count, ( 6) The number of hits on the previous day, (7) Number of hits on the previous day, (8) Special possession ball display, and (9) Version information.

  (8) The possessed ball special display is a special display for displaying a possessed ball of a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 using a predetermined image. In other words, the possessed sphere of the player can be simply expressed as a possessed sphere simple display using a predetermined image. In the present embodiment, the case where the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 performs the possessed ball special display will be described as an example.

  Further, the display contents of the first display unit 430 at the time of simultaneous production are defined as (1) jackpot running production, (2) pachinko machine special video, and (3) special character video.

  (1) The big hit running effect is the first of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model when the big hit pachinko machine 2 exists in the same type of pachinko machines 2. This is an effect of displaying a special video celebrating the big hit on the display unit 430. The running effect is realized by displaying a big hit video with a certain time difference on the data display device 4 from end to end of the game island.

  (2) The special video of the pachinko machine is a promotional video of the pachinko machine 2 of the model, and is displayed simultaneously on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. Let

  (3) The special character image is an image of a hidden character or a mascot character of the pachinko machine 2 of the model, and the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. To display the effect simultaneously.

  Further, the display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state are defined as (1) vacancy information, (2) jackpot information, (3) latency probability change information, and (4) time reduction information.

  (1) The vacant table information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently vacant. Whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant stand is, for example, when there is no game signal received from the pachinko machine 2 for a certain period of time (for example, when no out signal or safe signal is received). Judgment can be made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with the inter-counter counting unit 5, so that information such as the card ejection signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 and the number of internal balls recorded on the internal ball card etc. It is also possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is empty based on the above. Further, the signal from the pachinko machine 2 and the signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 may be used together to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is an empty base. In this case, the vacant stand determination can be performed more reliably.

  Unlike the present embodiment, an embodiment in which a card unit for receiving a membership card or a visitor card and processing card information is also provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. In this case, it is also possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is empty based on information such as a card discharge signal from the card unit, a prepaid balance remaining on the card, the number of balls, etc. It is. Further, it may be determined whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is an empty board by using a signal from the pachinko machine 2 and a signal from the card unit together. Also in this case, the vacant stand determination can be performed more reliably.

  Even if the game signal is not received from the pachinko machine 2 for a certain period of time or more, the player may have left the seat for reasons such as a toilet break after securing a seat. Therefore, for the pachinko machine 2 on which the player is not seated, the store clerk may look around and check whether or not the base is an empty base. If it is an empty table, the store clerk may set the data display device 4 to display that it is an empty table using the setting remote controller at hand.

  (2) The jackpot information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is hitting the jackpot. While the jackpot signal is being received from the pachinko machine 2, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 2 is jackpot.

  (3) The latent probability changing information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in the latent probability changing state. During the latent probability change, since the probability change state is latent and the lottery is performed with a probability change probability, the player is likely to win a big hit by continuing the game as it is.

  (4) Time reduction information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in a time reduction state. During the short time, the player can rotate in the electric support (support by electric tulip) state for a predetermined number of rotations (for example, 30 rotations), but since the lottery is performed with a normal probability, Same as normal.

  In addition, (1) store advertisement information, (2) new stand replacement information, and (3) store event information are defined as display contents of the second display unit 440 during simultaneous production.

  (1) Store advertisement information is information indicating the business hours of the store, the model name of the installed pachinko machine 2, the service content, and the like.

  (2) New machine replacement information is information indicating the pachinko machine 2 introduced as a new machine and information for notifying the date and time of the next new machine replacement.

  (3) Store event information is information relating to an event performed at the store. For example, information such as Ladies' Day or Silver Day is included.

  In the display table 681, game information based on information output from the pachinko machine 2 is determined as display contents of the second display unit 440. Specifically, (1) vacant stand information, (2) jackpot information, (3) latent probability change information, and (4) time reduction information defined as display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state are the pachinko machine 2 It is information that can be specified based on the game signal output from. Therefore, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 6 can set the game information based on the information output from the pachinko machine 2 as the display content of the second display unit 440. Thereby, it is possible to make the game information visible to a player other than the player. For example, when the game information is the identification of the latent probability change state, the player is informed that the latent probability change is in progress to a player other than the player without knowing that the latent probability change is in progress. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the display table 681, as information to be displayed on the second display unit 440, less information than information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 is determined. Thereby, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 6 sets the display content so that less information than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 is displayed on the second display unit 440. According to this, information other than the player can be visually recognized with an appropriate amount of information. Since the information displayed on the second display unit 440 is for players other than the player, the information may be less than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 that the player confirms during the game. When a player looks around the entire amusement island, it is considered that there are many cases where it does not usually look so fine.

  In the display table 681, display contents to be displayed on the display unit (first display unit 430, second and second display unit 440) of the data display device 4 are determined, and the CPU 610 displays the display table. 681 is used to create display setting data 691 to set the display content of the display unit of the data display device 4. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has display content setting means for setting the display content of the data display device 4.

  The simultaneous effect display table 682 is a table related to the display setting of the data display device 4 at the time of the simultaneous effect, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. In the simultaneous effect display table 682, a model name, a simultaneous effect type, a simultaneous effect display condition, and simultaneous effect video data 493 are defined in association with each other.

The simultaneous effect type is various display contents defined in the display type “simultaneous effect” in the display table 681.
The simultaneous effect display condition is a condition for causing the first display unit 430 to display the simultaneous effect.
The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 when the simultaneous effect display condition is satisfied.

  For example, for the model name “Pachinko XXX”, “Big hit running production”, “Pachinko machine special video”, and “Special character video” are defined as simultaneous production types. The simultaneous performance display condition of the “big hit running effect” is “there is a big hit pachinko machine in the same model of the pachinko machine”. It is.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “pachinko machine special image” is “every time the first specified time has elapsed”, and in this case, the simultaneous effect image displayed on the first display unit 430 is “Movie_XXX2”. The first specified time can be set as appropriate, for example, 3 hours.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “special character image” is “every second specified time has elapsed”, and the simultaneous effect image displayed on the first display unit 430 in this case is “Movie_XXX3”. The second specified time can be set as appropriate, for example, 2 hours.

  As for the model name “Pachinko YYY”, as shown in the drawing, data relating to a plurality of simultaneous performances is defined.

  In the simultaneous effect display table 682, display conditions are set in addition to the display contents of the display unit of the data display device 4, and the CPU 610 uses the simultaneous effect display table 682 for display settings. By creating the data 691, display contents and display conditions of the data display device 4 are set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has display condition setting means for setting the display conditions of the data display device 4 in addition to the display content setting means.

  The display pattern table 683 is a table that defines display patterns of information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, and includes a first display unit display pattern table 683a and a second display unit. This includes the display pattern table 683b.

  FIG. 08 is an example of a table configuration of the first display unit display pattern table 683a, and the display type, the display pattern, and the display mode of the first display unit 430 are defined in association with each other. As described above, two types of display, “normal” and “simultaneous production”, are defined as display types.

  “Pattern A, Pattern B, Pattern C, Pattern D,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “Normal”. For example, in “pattern A”, the display mode of the first display unit 430 is “model name” in the first display window, “start count” in the second display window,. It is stipulated that “the number of hits per day” and “the possessed ball special display” are displayed in the eighth display window. Similarly, for example, in “pattern C”, “model name” in the first display window, “start count” in the second display window,..., “Probability hit count” in the seventh display window, eighth display window It is stipulated that “owned ball special display” is displayed on the screen.

  “Pattern a, pattern b, pattern c, pattern d,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “simultaneous effect”. Specifically, as the display mode of the first display unit 430, “full-screen big hit running video” is displayed for “pattern a”, “pachinko machine promotional video for full screen”, “pattern c” for “pattern b”. “Full screen special character video” and “Pattern d” display “live video”.

  FIG. 09 is an example of the table configuration of the second display unit display pattern table 683b. Like the first display unit display pattern table 683a, the display type, the display pattern, and the display mode of the second display unit 440 are as follows. It is determined in association. As described above, two types of display, “normal” and “simultaneous production”, are defined.

  “Pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R, pattern S,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “normal”. As the display mode of the second display unit 440, “full screen vacancy information” is displayed for “pattern P”, “full screen big hit information” is displayed for “pattern Q”, and “full screen latency probability change” is displayed for “pattern R”. “Information” and “Pattern S” are respectively determined to display “full-screen time information”.

  “Pattern p, pattern q, pattern r,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “simultaneous effect”. As the display mode of the second display unit 440, “full screen store advertising information” is displayed for “pattern p”, “full screen new stand replacement information” is displayed for “pattern q”, and “full screen store information” is displayed for “pattern r”. It is determined that “event information” is displayed.

  In the display pattern table 683, it is determined what display target is to display data on the display unit of the data display device 4, and the CPU 610 uses the display pattern table 683 to display setting data 691 for display. Is created, the display mode of the data display device 4 is set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has a display mode setting unit for setting the display mode of the data display device 4 in addition to the display content setting unit and the display condition setting unit.

  The display setting data 691 is a display setting that the processing unit 410 individually sets for each data display device 4 based on the display table 681, the simultaneous effect display table 682, and the display pattern table 683 described above. FIG. 26 shows an example of the data structure.

  The display setting data 691 stores a pachinko machine ID, a model name, setting data, and simultaneous effect setting data in association with each other.

In the setting data, a display type, display contents, and a display pattern are stored in association with each other.
The display content and the display pattern include the display content and the display pattern of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. In the simultaneous effect setting data, the simultaneous effect type, the simultaneous effect display condition, and the simultaneous effect video data 493 are stored in association with each other.

  Such display setting data 691 is individually created for each of the plurality of data display devices 4, and is transmitted to the corresponding data display device 4, so that it is appropriate for each data display device 4 regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2. It is possible to perform a correct display.

The game total database 684 is a database in which data related to games in the management pachinko machine 2 is stored, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
In the game total database 684, game total data is stored for each management pachinko machine 2. Each game total data stores a pachinko machine ID, which is identification information of the management pachinko machine 2, a model name, occurrence frequency data, and average jackpot frequency data in association with each other.

  For example, date, start count, out, safe, and big hit count are stored in the occurrence count data in association with each other. The number of big hits usually includes the number of big hits, the number of probability variation big hits, the number of latent probability variations, and the number of time reductions. Although not shown in the drawings, depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2, there is a model that has a small hit or an abruptness. Therefore, the number of occurrences may be stored in the occurrence number data.

  In the average jackpot number data, an average value of the number of occurrences of the normal jackpot and an average value of the number of occurrences of the probability variation jackpot are stored.

  Note that the data collected by the hall computer 6 is not limited to the above data. For each pachinko machine 2, the hall computer 6 also aggregates and manages data relating to the profit and loss of the store. For example, data such as quotients (machine quotients and premium quotients), payout rates, customer delay rates, sales balls, premium balls, premiums, and gross profits are also tabulated, and these data are also stored in the hard disk 680 in a database. Is stored in memory.

  The RAM 690 is a readable / writable volatile memory, and in this embodiment, display setting data 691 in which display contents, display conditions, and display modes for each data display device 4 are set is stored. The RAM 690 is backed up by a battery (not shown), and data stored for a predetermined period is retained even when the power is turned off.

[3-6. Configuration of data display device]
28 and 29 are diagrams showing an example of the external configuration of the data display device 4.
The data display device 4 includes a first display unit 430 for displaying game information based on at least information output from the pachinko machine 2 for a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2, and a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2. And a second display unit 440 for displaying information for other players, that is, surrounding players.

  In the following description, based on the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2, the front and back directions with respect to the player are the front and rear directions, the right and left directions with respect to the player are the left and right directions, and the player is the reference. Up and down directions are defined as up and down directions, respectively.

  FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B are perspective views of the data display device 4. The housing of the data display device 4 includes a base portion 4A having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a door portion configured to protrude forward from the right end portion and the left end portion of the base portion 4A. 4B. The left and right door portions 4B are designed so that the width thereof is half the width of the base portion 4A.

  FIG. 28 (3) is a front view of the data display device 4. A first display portion 430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is formed on the front surface of the base portion 4A. The first display unit 430 is formed so as to face the player, and a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 can visually recognize the first display unit 430 from the game position. That is, the first display unit 430 is formed in a direction in which the player can visually recognize the game position from which the player plays.

  FIG. 28 (4) is a right side view of the data display device 4. A second display portion 440 for displaying information for players other than the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 is formed on one of the left and right surfaces of the door portion 4B. The second display portion 440 is formed on the right side of the right door portion 4B when viewed from the player and on the left side of the left door portion 4B when viewed from the player. That is, the 2nd display part 440 is formed in the outer surface of each door part 4B, and the player cannot visually recognize the 2nd display part 440 from a game position. On the other hand, a player other than a player who does not view the pachinko machine 2 from the front, for example, a player who selects the pachinko machine 2 that starts the game by looking over the pachinko machine 2 of the game island from the edge of the game island, The second display unit 440 can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (2), the left and right door portions 4B are configured to be folded and housed inward. Specifically, the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inward by hinges 4C. Since the widths of the left and right door portions 4B are both designed to be half the width of the base portion 4A excluding the hinge 4C, when the left and right door portions 4B are closed, the base portion 4A is just overlapped. At this time, the left and right door portions 4B are parallel to the base portion 4A, and the first display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 4B. Since the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inward in this manner, the left and right door portions 4B are folded when the data display device 4 is installed on the game island or removed from the game island. The installation work and the removal work can be easily performed.

  In addition, the second display unit 440 is formed on an outer surface that is not visible to the player when the door unit 4B is opened. However, when the door unit 4B is closed, the player displays the second display unit 440. It will be in a state visible from the front. Thus, in the data display device 4, the first display unit 430 is visible to the player, but the second display unit 440 is not visible to the player (while the players other than the player can see). 1 state (a state in which the second display unit 440 is perpendicular to the first display unit 430) and the player cannot see the first display unit 430, but the second display unit 440 It is also possible to enter a second state (a state in which the second display unit 440 is parallel to the first display unit 430) that can be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of the second display unit 440. In this embodiment, the 2nd display part 440 is comprised so that attachment or detachment of the transparent plastic lid P which covers this whole 2nd display part 440 is possible. The display surface of the second display portion 440 protrudes from the housing surface with the door portion 4B open (the right door portion 4B protrudes to the right, and the left door portion 4B protrudes to the left. And an outward fitting step portion 441 that forms a step between the housing surface of the second display portion 440 and the display surface of the second display portion 440 is provided.

  A plastic lid P shown in FIG. 29 is a lid member in which a peripheral wall 443 projects from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom plate 442, and has a tray shape in which the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 are integrally formed of a light-transmitting plastic material. Have. An inward fitting step 444 that forms a step between the surface of the bottom plate 442 on which the peripheral wall 443 projects and the end surface (tray-shaped edge surface) of the peripheral wall 443 is provided. By fitting the fitting step 444 with the outward fitting step 441, the inner surface of the inward fitting step 444 is engaged with the outer surface of the outward fitting step 441, and the plastic lid P And the second display unit 440 are integrated.

  Further, a POP advertisement 445 for informing various kinds of information to the player can be inserted into the recess formed by the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 of the plastic lid P. In the POP advertisement 445, for example, information related to sales of a store where the pachinko machine 2 is installed and information related to an event performed in the store can be posted.

  In FIG. 29, as an example of the POP advertisement 445, a POP advertisement 445 indicating that the day is Ladies' Day which is one of the event days is shown. When the POP advertisement 445 is inserted into the recess of the plastic lid P and the inward fitting step 444 is fitted to the outward fitting step 441 of the door 4B, the POP advertisement 445 is attached to the bottom plate 442. It is supported by being sandwiched between the display surface of the second display unit 440 and covers the display screen of the second display unit 440.

  Moreover, since the plastic lid P has translucency, the inserted POP advertisement 445 can be visually recognized by the player from the outside through the bottom plate 442. The pachinko machine 2 on which the POP advertisement 445 for Ladies' Day is placed on the corresponding data display device 4 is a stand exclusively for women, and only women can play games.

  It should be noted that the POP advertisement is not limited to the notification of the above event data. For example, new machine information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 installed corresponding to the data display device 4 is a new machine, Various kinds of information such as a yen pachinko machine, a 2-yen pachinko machine, a 1-yen pachinko machine, information indicating the model name of the pachinko machine 2 can be posted.

  Thus, by making it possible to attach the plastic lid P to the second display unit 440, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information for players other than the player. Moreover, the surrounding player can confirm the information regarding a shop or the pachinko machine 2 by attaching the plastic lid P through the POP advertisement. In addition, when the second display unit 440 is covered with a POP advertisement or the like in this manner, the second display unit 440 displays that the latent probability change state is displayed, and the display is displayed to the player and other than the player. When the player does not want to show the player, the display on the second display unit 440 can be made invisible.

  Here, in order to set the second display unit 440 so as not to display that the latent probability changing state is displayed, the second display unit 440 is in the latent probability changing state on the hall computer 6 or each data display device 4 side. It is necessary to perform a setting process for preventing the message from being displayed. On the other hand, when the second display unit 440 is covered with a cover such as a POP advertisement, such setting processing is not required, and it is temporarily displayed on the second display unit 440 that the latent probability changing state is displayed. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player and players other than the player from seeing this.

  Also, for example, on an event day such as Ladies' Day, only the player (for example, female customer) who is the target of the event is operated so that the second display unit 440 can be viewed by removing the POP advertisement or the like. Also good. Furthermore, when a player (for example, a female customer) who is the subject of such an event plays a game, the POP advertisement is removed and the door 4B is folded inward (the second state described above). The second display unit 440 may be visible from the player, and the latent probability changing state may be displayed on the second display unit. According to this, only a specific player such as an event subject can view the display content of the second display unit 440.

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the data display device 4.
The data display device 4 includes a processing unit 410, an operation unit 420, a first display unit 430, a second display unit 440, a sound output unit 450, a clock unit 455, a short-range wireless communication unit 460, The first communication unit 470, the second communication unit 480, the third communication unit 485, and the storage unit 490 are configured.

  The processing unit 410 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each unit of the data display device 4 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 490, and includes a processor such as a CPU or DSP. Configured. The processing unit 410 includes a display setting unit 411, a first display control unit 412, a second display control unit 413, and a possessed ball special display control unit 415 as main functional units.

  The operation unit 420 is an input unit having a touch panel 421 configured integrally with the first display unit 430, and outputs an operation input signal for the touch panel 421 to the processing unit 410. Various instruction operations such as calling a store clerk and selecting a menu are performed by a tap operation on the touch panel 421.

  The first display unit 430 is a display formed on the base unit 4A as described above. The first display unit 430 includes an LCD and the like, and displays various displays based on display control signals output from the first display control unit 412. It is the display device which performs.

  The second display unit 440 is a display formed on the door unit 4B as described above, and includes an LCD or the like, and various displays based on a display control signal output from the second display control unit 413. It is the display device which performs.

  The sound output unit 450 is a sound output device that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 410. From the processing unit 410, sound or the like related to the video to be displayed on the first display unit 430 or the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 is output.

  The short-range wireless communication unit 460 is a communication device that performs wireless communication with a communication device such as a setting remote controller that a store clerk possesses. As a method for the short-range wireless communication unit 460 to perform wireless communication, infrared communication can be typically applied. In addition to infrared communication, for example, a short-range wireless communication module that realizes short-range wireless communication conforming to a communication standard such as ZigBee (registered trademark) or Bluetooth (registered trademark) is incorporated, and wireless communication is performed according to these communication methods. It is also possible to perform.

  The clock unit 455 is an internal clock of the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The clocked time (including date) of the clock unit 455 is output to the processing unit 410. The clock unit 455 corresponds to a time measuring unit.

The first communication unit 470 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 2, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. The 1st communication part 470 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives various game signals from the pachinko machine 2 according to a parallel communication system.
When the pachinko machine 2 is an encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, the first communication unit 470 is provided with a serial communication terminal for receiving a game signal including information on points from the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B in a serial communication method. The game signal may be received from the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B according to the serial communication method.

  The second communication unit 480 is a communication device for performing communication with the hall computer 6, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. The second communication unit 480 has a parallel communication terminal and receives display setting data and a simultaneous effect display instruction signal from the hall computer 6 according to the parallel communication method.

  The third communication unit 485 is a communication device for performing communication with the inter-counter counting unit 5, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The third communication unit 485 has a parallel communication terminal and receives the possessed ball signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 according to the parallel communication method.

  The storage unit 490 is a storage device that includes a memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, or a RAM. The storage unit 490 stores a main program 491 that is read by the processing unit 410 and executed as a main process. The main program 491 includes a display setting program 491a executed as a display setting process (see FIG. 34), a display control program 491b executed as a display control process (see FIGS. 35 and 36), and a possessed ball special display process ( And a possessed sphere special display program executed as a subroutine). These processes will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  The storage unit 490 also includes display image data 492, simultaneous effect video data 493, a possessed ball special display threshold table 495, a display pattern table 683, display setting data 691, and possessed ball number data 496. Processing data 497 is stored.

  The display image data 492 is image data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440. In the present embodiment, the display image data 492 includes data of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image when the possessed ball special display is performed.

  The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data of the simultaneous effect displayed on the first display unit 430 during the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 2. The simultaneous effect video data 493 includes video data for performing a big hit running effect, promotional video data of the pachinko machine 2, video data of hidden characters and mascot characters of the pachinko machine 2, live video data of the pachinko machine 2 and the like. Includes various video data.

The possessed sphere special display threshold value table 495 is a table that defines display threshold values for the possessed sphere when the first display unit 430 performs the possessed sphere special display, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. 31.
In the possessed sphere special display threshold value table, four display threshold values are defined: a first display threshold value, a first non-display threshold value, a second display threshold value, and a second non-display threshold value.

The first display threshold value is a threshold value for the number of possessed balls for displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430, and is set to 1000 shots, for example. The first display threshold corresponds to the first value.
The first non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed balls for making the first predetermined image displayed on the first display unit 430 non-display, and for example, 800 is set. The first non-display threshold corresponds to the second value.

  The first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value are determined to have a difference corresponding to a predetermined number of balls (hereinafter referred to as “first predetermined number”). Specifically, in the example of FIG. 31, the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the first non-display threshold is 800 shots. A value smaller than 200 is set. As described above, the difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold by the first predetermined number is that the display / non-display of the first predetermined image is performed by increasing / decreasing the number of possessed balls just before the threshold. The purpose is to prevent frequent switching.

  In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number of 200 shots is set based on the number by which the number of possessed balls of the player decreases at a predetermined opportunity. In the present embodiment, a case where the predetermined opportunity is a one-time refund of a pachinko ball by a player's refund operation is illustrated. By the player's refund operation, 125 pachinko balls are refunded to the player at a time. That is, the number of possessed balls of the player that is reduced by one refund operation is 125 shots. The first predetermined number is 200 shots with a margin of 75 shots for the refund number of 125 shots.

The second display threshold value is a threshold value for the number of possessed balls for displaying the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430, and for example, 5000 shots are set. The second display threshold corresponds to the third value.
The second non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed spheres for making the second predetermined image displayed on the first display unit 430 non-display, and for example, 4600 shots are set. The second non-display threshold corresponds to the fourth value.

  The second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value are also determined to have a difference corresponding to a predetermined number of balls (hereinafter referred to as “second predetermined number”). Specifically, in the example of FIG. 31, the second display threshold value is 5000 shots, and the second non-display threshold value is 4600 shots. A value that is smaller than 400 is set. In this way, the second predetermined number of differences is provided between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold. The display non-display of the second predetermined image is performed by increasing or decreasing the number of possessed balls just before the threshold. The purpose is to prevent frequent switching.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the threshold value is set so that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. In the example of FIG. 31, since the first predetermined number is 200 and the second predetermined number is 400, the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. The purpose of this is to make conditions for non-display of the second predetermined image stricter than conditions for non-display of the first predetermined image. The second predetermined image is a special image different from the first predetermined image to be displayed when the number of possessed balls reaches a large number such as 5000 or 10,000, and gives the player a sense of superiority and the surrounding games Since the purpose is to appeal to customers, the second predetermined image is less likely to be hidden compared to the first predetermined image.

Note that the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number need to be numbers that do not exceed the first display threshold.
Further, in the above example, the number (200 shots) with a margin is set as the first predetermined number, which is a number that reduces the number of balls possessed by the player (125 shots) by one refund operation. Instead of this, the number (125 shots) by which the number of balls possessed by the player is reduced by one refund operation may be determined as the first predetermined number. The first predetermined number may be determined based on the first display threshold. In this case, a number that is preferably 1/3 or less of the first display threshold value, more preferably a number that is 1/5 or less of the first display threshold value, is set as the first predetermined number.

  In the present embodiment, the second predetermined number is described as being greater than the first predetermined number. However, the same number as the first predetermined number may be determined as the second predetermined number. Good. That is, in the above example, the second predetermined number may be the same 200 as the first predetermined number. However, it is desirable that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number, and it is preferable to set a number about 1.5 to 2 times the first predetermined number as the second predetermined number. .

  Further, unlike the above, the number indicated by one signal of the possessed ball signal output from the inter-counter counting unit 5 may be determined as the first predetermined number. For example, if the inter-unit counting unit 5 is configured to output the possessed ball signal to the data display device 4 every time the count value of the pachinko ball reaches 100 shots, the possessed ball signal is indicated by one signal. Since the number is 100 shots, the 100 shots may be set as the first predetermined number.

  The possessed ball number data 496 is data in which the number of possessed balls of a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 corresponding to the data display device 4 is stored, and the possessed ball signal received from the inter-unit counting unit 5 at intermittent timing. Updated based on

  The processing data 497 is processing data for the processing unit 410 to perform the possessed ball special display in the possessed ball special display control process, and includes a first display counter value, a second display counter value, a first integer n, Data for processing such as the second integer m and the number of intermediate possessed balls is temporarily stored.

[3-7. Process flow]
[3-7-1. Hall computer processing]
32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the flow of management processing executed by the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 in accordance with the management program 671 stored in the ROM 670.

  The CPU 610 performs loop A processing for each data display device 4 (A1 to A11). The loop A means that each step in the loop A is executed for each data display device 4 in order or in parallel.

  In loop A, the display content setting unit 611 performs display content setting processing for the data display device 4 (A3). Specifically, the display content setting unit 611 uses the display table 681, the simultaneous effect display table 682, and the display pattern table 683 stored in the hard disk 680 to display setting data for the data display device 4. 691 is created and stored in the RAM 690 (A5). Then, the display content setting unit 611 confirms the connection with the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the management pachinko machine 2 (A7), and if the connection is confirmed, the created display setting is made. Data 691 is transmitted to the data display device 4 (A9). Then, the process proceeds to the next data display device 4.

  When the processing of the loop A for all the next data display devices 4 is completed (A11), the CPU 610 receives a game signal from each pachinko machine 2 (A13). Based on the received game signal, the game totaling unit 612 updates the game total data of the pachinko machine 2 and stores it in the game total database 684 of the hard disk 680 (A15).

  Next, the CPU 610 determines whether or not the display condition for the big hit running effect is satisfied (A17), and if it is determined that it is satisfied (A17; Yes), the big hit running effect display instruction signal is sent to each data display device 4. Transmit (A19). At this time, in order to cause the data display device 4 to perform a big hit running effect with a predetermined time difference, a big hit running effect display instruction signal is applied to each data display device 4 with a delay corresponding to the above time difference. Send. Then, the CPU 610 moves the process to A25.

  If it is determined that the display condition for the big hit running effect is not satisfied (A17; No), the CPU 610 determines whether or not other simultaneous effect display conditions are satisfied (A21), and if it is determined that the condition is satisfied. (A21; Yes), a display instruction signal for a simultaneous effect image corresponding to the established simultaneous effect display condition is transmitted to each data display device 4 (A23). Then, the CPU 610 moves the process to A25. If it is determined that other simultaneous effect display conditions are not satisfied (A21; No), the CPU 610 moves the process to A29.

  After A19 or A23, the CPU 610 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the simultaneous performance (A25), and if it is determined that it is the end timing (A25; Yes), the simultaneous display display end instruction signal is sent to each data. It transmits to the display device 4 (A27). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the simultaneous performance (A25; Yes), the CPU 610 moves the process to A29.

  Thereafter, the CPU 610 determines whether or not to end the process (A29). For example, when the power of the hall computer 6 is turned off when the store is closed, it is determined that the process is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (A29; No), CPU610 will return a process to A13. If it is determined that the process is to be terminated (A29; Yes), the management process is terminated.

[3-7-2. Data display device processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the flow of the display setting process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 according to the display setting program 491a stored in the storage unit 490.

  First, the display setting unit 411 establishes communication with the hall computer 6 (B1). Then, the display setting unit 411 requests the hall computer 6 to transmit the display setting data 691 of the data display device 4 (B3).

  Next, the display setting unit 411 receives the display setting data 691 from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480 and stores it in the storage unit 490 (B5). Then, based on the received display setting data 691, initial display settings of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 are performed (B7). If the initial display setting is performed, the first display control unit 412 and the second display control unit 413 start executing the display control process according to the display control program 491b stored in the storage unit 490 (B9). Then, the display setting unit 411 ends the display setting process.

35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the flow of the display control process.
First, the processing unit 410 performs an empty table determination process (C1). Specifically, as described above, based on the game signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 and the card ejection signal transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is currently an empty board. judge. As a result, if it is determined that it is an empty board (C3; Yes), the second display control unit 413 controls to display the empty board information on the second display unit 440 (C5). On the other hand, if it determines with it not being an empty board (C3; No), the process part 410 will move a process to C11.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not a game has been started on the pachinko machine 2 (C7). If it is determined that the game has started (C7; Yes), the empty table displayed on the second display unit 440 is determined. Control is performed so that the information is not displayed (C9). If it is determined that the game has not started (C7; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the process to C11.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is playing a game (C11). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 2 is playing a game (C11; Yes), the first processing is performed based on the received game signal. Control to update the display of the display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 is performed (C15). Specifically, based on the game signal received from the pachinko machine 2, the display information such as the number of jackpots displayed on the first display unit 430 and the number of start times is updated and displayed on the second display unit 440. The display of the jackpot information, latent probability change information, and time information is updated. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 2 is not playing a game (C11; No), the processing unit 410 moves the process to C15.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the possessed ball signal is received from the inter-unit counting unit 5 (C15), and if it is determined that it has been received (C15; Yes), based on the received possessed ball signal. The possessed ball number data 495 in the storage unit 490 is updated (C17). Then, the processing unit 410 performs possessed ball special display control processing according to the possessed ball special display control program 491c stored in the storage unit 490 (C19). If it is determined that the possessed ball signal has not been received from the inter-counter counting unit 5 (C15; No), the processing unit 410 moves the process to C21.

  Thereafter, the first display control unit 412 determines whether or not a simultaneous effect display instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 6 (C21). If it is determined that it has been received (C21; Yes), execution of the big hit running effect is performed. It is determined whether or not an instruction has been given (C23).

  If it is determined that the execution instruction for the big hit running effect has been made (C23; Yes), the first display control unit 412 performs control to display the big hit running video on the first display unit 430 based on the display setting data 691. Perform (C25). As described above, the display instruction signal for running effect output from the hall computer 6 is delayed by a delay time corresponding to a predetermined time difference. As a result, each data display device 4 causes the first display unit 430 to display the big hit running video with the above time difference, thereby realizing the big hit running effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution instruction for the big hit running effect has not been made (C23; No), the first display control unit 412 displays the simultaneous effect image corresponding to the simultaneous effect display condition included in the simultaneous effect display instruction signal. Control to display on the 1 display unit 430 is performed (C27).

  Next, the first display control unit 412 determines whether or not the simultaneous effect display is to be ended (C29), and if it is determined not to be ended (C29; No), it waits as it is. Moreover, if it determines with complete | finishing (C29; Yes), control which complete | finishes the simultaneous effect display of the 1st display part 430 will be performed (C31).

  If it is determined in C21 that the simultaneous effect display instruction signal has not been received from the hall computer 6 (C21; No), the first display control unit 412 determines whether it is the display timing of the version information (C33). . The display timing of the version information may be a timing each time a predetermined time elapses, or may be a timing at which the player or the player detects that the version information display icon displayed on the first display unit 430 has been tapped. Good. Further, the version information display may be included in the simultaneous effect display, and the version information simultaneous effect display may be performed in synchronization with the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 2.

  If it is determined that it is the display timing of the version information (C33; Yes), the first display control unit 412 displays the version information of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 in the first display unit 430. The display is controlled (C35). Here, the version information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 includes information such as the model name of the pachinko machine 2 and the number of models of the pachinko machine 2, the normal jackpot probability, the probability variation jackpot probability, the probability variation rush rate, the continuation rate It is.

  Next, the first display control unit 412 determines whether or not it is the display end timing of the version information (C37). If it is determined that it is not the display end timing (C37; No), it waits as it is. If it is determined that it is the display end timing (C37; Yes), control is performed to end the display of the version information on the first display unit 430 (C39).

  After C31 or C39, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the processing (C41). For example, when an operation to turn off the power of the data display device 4 is performed, it is determined that the processing is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (C41; No), the process part 410 will return a process to C1. If it is determined that the process is to be terminated (C41; Yes), the display control process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the flow of the possessed ball special display control process. In this process, the display numbers of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are determined according to the two display counter values of the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and the first predetermined image is determined based on the display number. Control is performed so that the image and the second predetermined image are displayed on the first display unit 430. In this process, “first” is added to the head of the coefficient (parameter value) used for display control and non-display control of the first predetermined image, and the coefficient (parameter value) used for display control and non-display control of the second predetermined image. ) Is preceded by “second”. The first display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the first predetermined image, the second display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the second predetermined image, and these are a kind of processing data 497. It is. In the following description, it is assumed that the first display counter value and the second display counter value are initially set to 0.

  First, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 calculates the integer part of the second integer m = [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] (D1). The second integer m is a coefficient used for setting the second display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 497.

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 calculates the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) (D3). The number of intermediate possessed balls is a coefficient used for setting the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 497.

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls has reached the second non-display threshold (D5). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possessed balls is the same as the second non-display threshold or exceeds the second non-display threshold.

  If it is determined that the condition is satisfied in D5 (D5; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the second display counter value is larger than m (D7). If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D7; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets m + 1 as the second display counter value (D9). This means that the latest second display counter value is maintained. Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets the first display counter value to 0 (D11), and then proceeds to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D5 (D5; No), or when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D7 (D7; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets m to the second display counter value. Is set (D13). Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 calculates the integer part of the first integer n = [number of intermediate possessed balls / first display threshold] (D15). The first integer n is a coefficient used for setting the first display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 497.

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls− (n × first display threshold) has reached the first non-display threshold (D17). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold value) is the same as or exceeds the first non-display threshold value. If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D17; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n (D21).

  If it is determined in D21 that the condition is satisfied (D21; Yes), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets n + 1 as the first display counter value (D23). This means that the latest first display counter value is maintained. And possessed ball special display control part 415 shifts processing to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition of D17 is not satisfied (D17; No), or when it is determined that the condition of D21 is not satisfied (D21; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 sets the first display counter value to n. Is set (D19).

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 performs control to display the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 according to the first display counter value (D25). Specifically, the same number of first predetermined images as the first display counter value are displayed on the first display unit 430.

  Moreover, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 performs control to display the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430 according to the second display counter value (D27). Specifically, the same number of second predetermined images as the second display counter value are displayed on the first display unit 430. Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 ends the possessed ball special display control process.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of possessed sphere special display in the possessed sphere special display control process. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots, the first non-display threshold is 800 shots, and a dollar box is displayed on the first display unit 430 as a first predetermined image will be described as an example.

  In the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. 37, the first display threshold value of 1000 shots is set as one display unit number, and every time the number of possessed balls reaches this display unit number (1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,.・ ・）, Increase the display of the dollar box by one. The first non-display threshold value of 800 shots is set as one non-display unit number, and each time the predetermined number of balls falls below the non-display unit number (800 shots, 1800 shots, 2800 shots,...), A dollar box Decrease the display of by 1.

  In the leftmost part of FIG. 38, a case where the number of possessed balls is 1800 is illustrated. Since the number of possessed balls exceeds 1000 which is the number of display units, one dollar box is displayed. Yes. Thereafter, the number of possessed balls increased and the number of possessed balls = 1900 shots. However, since the number of possessed balls has not yet exceeded the display unit number of 2000, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. Thereafter, when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the dollar box is increased by one and displayed.

  Thereafter, the number of possessed balls increased to 2100, but since the number of possessed balls does not exceed the display unit number of 3000, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. Then, it is assumed that the number of possessed balls decreases due to the player paying back the pachinko balls, and the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900. In this case, although the number of possessed balls is less than 2000 which is the number of display units, but is not less than 1800 which is the number of non-display units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged.

  It should be noted that the number of dollar boxes to be displayed differs between the case where the number of possessed balls increases from 1800 to 1900 and the number of possessed balls decreases from 2100 to 1900. Is a point. This means that even if the number of possessed balls is the same, the number of dollar boxes to be displayed may differ depending on whether the number of possessed balls changes in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. The details will be described later with a specific example.

  Thereafter, the number of possessed balls decreased to 1800 possessed balls, but since the number of possessed balls is not less than 1800 which is the number of non-display units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. When the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below 1800, which is the number of non-display units, one dollar box is reduced and one is displayed.

  Next, the details of the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. In the following description, the process in each step will be described with reference to each step of the possessed ball special display control process in FIG.

(1) Specific example 1
First, consider a case where the number of possessed balls = 1900.
At D1, the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the second display threshold value] = the integer part = [1900/5000]. The integer part = 0 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls- (m × second display threshold) = 1900− (0 × 5000) = 1900 is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 1900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold value. Since the determination result is negative, the process proceeds to D13.

In D13, since m = 0, 0 is set to the second display counter value.
In D15, the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possessed balls / the first display threshold value] = the integer part = [1900/1000] of the integer part = 1 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold value) = 1900− (1 × 1000) = 900 shots has reached the first non-display threshold value of 800 shots. Since affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to D21.

  In D21, it is determined whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 1900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the determination result of D21 is different. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, since the first display counter value = 1 when the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, the value is the same as n = 1. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is negative, and the process proceeds to D19. In D19, n (= 1) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 1 and the second display counter value = 0 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 1, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the first display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, and is larger than n = 1. Become. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D23. In D23, n + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set as the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 0 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  From the above example, even if the number of possessed balls is the same 1900, it is displayed when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900 and when the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000 It can be seen that the number of first predetermined images differs.

(2) Specific example 2
Next, consider a case where the number of possessed balls is 7900.
In D1, second integer m = integer part of [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] = integer part of [7900/5000] = 1 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 7900− (1 × 5000) = 2900 is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 2900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold value. Since the determination result is negative, the process proceeds to D13.

Since D13 is m = 1, 1 is set to the second display counter value.
In D15, the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possessed balls / first display threshold value] = integer part = [2900/1000] integer part = 2 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold) = 2900− (2 × 1000) = 900 has reached 800, which is the first non-display threshold, and this determination result Since affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to D21.

  In D21, it is determined whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 7900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 7900 after reaching 8000, the determination result of D21 differs. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 7900, the first display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 7000, so the value is the same as n = 2. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is negative, and the process proceeds to D19. In D19, n (= 2) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 1 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

  On the other hand, when the number of possessed balls has decreased to 7900 after reaching 8000, the first display counter value = 3 when the number of possessed balls reaches 8000, which is larger than n = 2. . For this reason, the determination result of D21 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D23. In D23, n + 1 (= 2 + 1 = 3) is set as the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 3 and the second display counter value = 1 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 3, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

(3) Specific example 3
Next, consider a case where the number of possessed balls is 9900.
In D1, second integer m = integer part of [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] = integer part of [9900/5000] = 1 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 9900 shots− (1 × 5000) = 4900 shots is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 4900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold. Since this determination result is affirmative, the process moves to D7.

  In D7, it is determined whether or not the second display counter value is larger than m. Here, since the second display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 9900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 9900 after reaching 10,000, the determination result of D7 differs. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 9900, the second display counter value = 1 when the possessed number of balls reaches 5000, so the same value as m = 1. For this reason, the determination result of D7 is negative, and the process is transferred to D13. In D13, m (= 1) is set as the second display counter value.

  On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls decreases to 9900 after reaching 10,000, the second display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, which is larger than m = 1. . For this reason, the determination result of D7 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D9. At D9, m + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set as the second display counter value. That is, the second display counter value is maintained. In D11, 0 is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 0 and the second display counter value = 2 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 0, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 2. .

  As described above, when the number of balls held by the player increases, the player keeps the counting lever 341 in a state where the pachinko ball is discharged from the pachinko machine 2 from the lower plate 24 to the counting passage 343 at any time. The pachinko balls that are discharged from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341 are stored in the lower plate 24, and the pachinko balls are somewhat accumulated. By pulling the counting lever 341 at the accumulated stage, the accumulated pachinko balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke and are counted, and there are two cases of increasing at once.

  The latter case (when the number of possessed balls increases at a stretch) is particularly problematic. As described above, since the data display device 4 receives the possessed ball signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 at intermittent timing, the number of possessed balls specified from the possessed ball signal received at one timing and the next timing There may be a large difference in the number of possessed spheres identified from the possessed sphere signal received at. Specifically, by storing the pachinko balls that the player wins during the big hit until the lower plate 24 is full, a large number of pachinko balls are counted at a time, and the number of possessed balls is, for example, 1000 There is a case where it increases at a time in a numerical range of from 2,000 to 2,000. In this case, since the first display threshold is 1000 shots, there may be a case where the number of possessed balls increases across two or three first display thresholds at a time.

  Assuming such a case, in the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. 37, two integers of the first integer n and the second integer m are calculated, and the first display counter value and the second integer are calculated using these integers. The display counter value is set. Thereby, it is possible to always display a correct number of predetermined images regardless of the degree of increase in the number of possessed balls (degree of increase).

  The display counter values (first display counter and second display counter value) are coefficients for specifying the display stage of the predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image), and the display stage is increased by one stage. It is a counter value that increases by 1 every time. Instead of storing such a display counter value, a display flag having a certain number of possessed balls as a reference number of game media may be set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on the display flag. Specifically, a value obtained by adding the first non-display threshold value to an integer multiple of the first display threshold value can be used as the reference game medium number, and a display flag for the reference game medium number can be set. For example, if the first display threshold is 1000 and the first non-display threshold is 800, 800, 1800, 2800,... Set the flag. Specifically, “1” is set in the display flag every time the number of possessed balls increases to reach an integral multiple of the first display threshold. Each time the number of possessed balls increases to reach the reference number of game media or the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below the reference number of game media, “0” is set in the display flag. Based on this display flag and the number of possessed balls, the display number of the predetermined image is determined.

  A case where the reference number of game media is 1800 is described. As described above, for example, when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the display number of the first predetermined image is 1, and after the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the number decreases to 1900. In this case, the display number of the first predetermined image needs to be two. Therefore, when the number of possessed balls increases and reaches 1800, the display flag is set to “0”, and when the number of possessed balls increases to reach 2000, the display flag is set to “1”. In this case, even if the number of possessed balls is reduced from 2000, the display flag remains set to “1” unless the number is less than 1800, which is the reference number of game media. In other words, when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the display flag is set to “0”, whereas when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the number decreases to 1900. Means that the display flag is set to “1”. Therefore, based on the fact that the number of possessed balls is one thousand, the display number of the first predetermined image is determined as 1 in the former case, and the display number of the first predetermined image is determined as 2 in the latter case. can do.

[3-7-3. Inter-counter counting unit processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the flow of the inter-unit counting unit processing executed by the CPU 510 of the inter-unit counting unit 5 in accordance with the inter-unit counting unit processing program 521 stored in the ROM 520.

  First, the CPU 510 determines whether or not a possession card has been inserted by the player (E1), and if it is determined that it has been inserted (E1; Yes), the card of the possession card from the possession card R / W 570 is determined. Information is acquired (E3). Then, the number of possessed balls included in the acquired card information is stored in the RAM 530 (E5). When it is determined that the holding card has not been inserted (E1; No), the CPU 510 shifts the process to E7.

  Next, the CPU 510 determines whether or not the ticketing button 551 has been pressed by the player (E7). If it is determined that the player has pressed the ticketing button 551 (E7; Yes), the ball card issuing process for issuing the ball card is performed. (E9). Specifically, control is performed such that the card information 531 associated with the number of possessed balls stored in the RAM 530 is written to the possession card for the possession card R / W 570, and the possession card is stored in the possession card. Control to cause the insertion / ejection unit 565 to eject is performed. If it is determined that the ticket issuing button 551 has not been pressed (E7; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E11.

  Next, the CPU 510 determines whether or not the payout button 552 has been pressed by the player (E11). If it is determined that the player has pressed the button (E11; Yes), a ball payout process is performed (E13). Specifically, control is performed so that the player pays out a predetermined number (125 shots) of pachinko balls to the counting payout unit 380. Then, the CPU 510 updates the number of possessed balls in the RAM 530 (E15). If it is determined that the payout button 552 has not been pressed (E11; No), the CPU 510 shifts the process to E17.

  Next, the CPU 510 determines whether or not a counting result has been input from the counting payout unit 5 (E17). If it is determined that it has been input (E17; Yes), the number of possessed balls in the RAM 530 is updated (E19). If it is determined that the count result has not been input (E17; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E21.

  Thereafter, the CPU 510 determines whether or not it is the output timing of the possessed ball signal (E21). And if it determines with it being an output timing (E21; Yes), it will control to output a possessed ball signal to the data display apparatus 4 (E23). If it is determined that it is not the possession ball signal output timing (E21; No), the CPU 510 shifts the processing to E25.

  Thereafter, the CPU 510 determines whether or not to end the process (E25). If it determines with continuing a process (E25; No), CPU510 will return a process to E1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (E25; Yes), CPU510 will complete | finish an inter-unit counting unit process.

[3-8. Display screen]
FIG. 40 (1) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the first display unit 430. On the upper part of the first display unit 430, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 is displayed. Below that is a display window with a number of big hits, number of starts, probability variation big hits, normal big hits, previous day big hits, previous day big hits, and special possession ball display. It is displayed in.

  In addition, a call icon, a menu icon, and a version information icon are displayed below the first display unit 430. The player can call the store clerk by tapping the call icon with a finger. Further, the player can select a menu by tapping the menu icon with a finger. When the menu icon is tapped with a finger, the display is switched to a menu selection screen (not shown), and display of past data and provision of various services (wagon service, hand towel, meal break, etc.) can be selected. Further, the player can display the version information of the pachinko machine 2 on the first display unit 430 by tapping the version information icon.

  FIG. 40 (2) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. The second display unit 440 displays vacant table information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is vacant. Specifically, a message “Available now” is displayed along with a message “vacant” in the center of the screen. By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is currently empty and can be played.

  FIG. 40 (3) is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. The second display unit 440 displays jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is hitting a jackpot. Specifically, a flame is displayed at the center of the screen, and a “big hit” message indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in big hit is displayed. By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in big hit.

  FIG. 41 (1) is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. The second display unit 440 displays latent probability changing information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latent probability at the center of the screen. Specifically, a jagged balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a message “latency probability changing” is displayed therein. In addition, a message “Now is a chance !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  Since the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the player's game position, the player cannot know that the latent probability is being changed. On the other hand, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latent probability by looking at the second display unit 440. That is, the viewing player knows that the stand is in a chance state, but the player continues playing without knowing that the stand is in a chance state. Also, if a player leaves the game without knowing that the latent probability is changing, the surrounding players know that the stand is in a chance state, so they sit on the stand and play the game. You can expect a big hit by doing it. As a result, a new interest that cannot be realized by the conventional call lamp device can be created.

  FIG. 41 (2) is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. The second display unit 440 displays time reduction information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is running short in the center of the screen. Specifically, a cloud-like balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a “short time” message is displayed therein. At the bottom of the screen, a message saying “Sorry.

  Since the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the player's game position, the player cannot know that the time is short. On the other hand, the watching game player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is short in time and has a low possibility of making a big hit by looking at the second display unit 440.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the possessed sphere special display displayed on the first display unit 430. FIG. 42 shows how the display of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image changes in accordance with the number of balls possessed by the player. Here, a case where a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image is illustrated. Further, the description will be made assuming that the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 5000 shots.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one dollar box is displayed (dollar box first display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box second display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, three dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box third display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, four dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box 4th Display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the display number of the dollar box becomes 5, but the display condition of the special box is satisfied, so the display of all dollar boxes is hidden and one special box is displayed. (Special box first display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 6000, the number of possessed balls has increased by 1000 on the basis of 5000, so one dollar box is displayed and one special box is displayed (dollar box first display stage & special box First display stage).
Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9,000, four dollar boxes and one special box are displayed (dollar box fourth display stage & special box first display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the number of dollar boxes displayed will be 5, but since the special box display conditions are met, all dollar box displays will be hidden and one special box will be added. Then, two special boxes are displayed (special box second display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, the number of possessed balls has increased by 1000 on the basis of 10,000, so one dollar box is displayed and two special boxes are displayed (dollar box first display stage & special Box second display stage).
The same applies to the following. For example, when the number of possessed balls reaches 15000, three special boxes are displayed (special box third display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the dollar box (first predetermined image) is increased by one for every 1000 balls possessed, but when the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the dollar box (first predetermined image) is increased. The special box (second predetermined image) is newly displayed with the display of (image) hidden.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the displayed dollar box (first predetermined image) is not hidden and the display of the dollar box (first predetermined image) is continued. A box (second predetermined image) may be newly displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating another example of the display screen of the possessed sphere special display displayed on the first display unit 430. Here, the case where the ball volume of the pachinko balls stacked in the thousand carton box as the first predetermined image is displayed and the car box as the second predetermined image is shown. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 10,000 shots is illustrated.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one pachinko ball is displayed in the thousand-thousand box (first thousand-thousand box first ball-bulk display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2,000, two pachinko balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes (the second car ball display stage in the thousand car boxes). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, 3 pachinko balls are displayed on the thousand boxes (3rd ball display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, 4 pachinko balls are displayed on the thousand boxes. (Thousands box fourth ball volume display stage).

  Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9000, nine pachinko balls are displayed in the thousand-thousand box (the nine-thousand box ninth-bulk display stage). And if the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be 10 tiers, but since no more pachinko balls can be stacked in the thousand car boxes, all the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be cleared, One box is displayed (the first display stage of both boxes).

  Thereafter, when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one pachinko ball is displayed on the thousand boxes, and one box is displayed (one thousand boxes first ball volume display stage & both boxes first display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 19000, nine pachinko balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes, and one car box is displayed (the thousand car boxes 9th ball display stage & the both car boxes first display stage) ). And when the number of possessed balls reaches 20000 balls, the ball capacity of the thousand boxes will be 10 tiers, but since no more pachinko balls can be stacked in the thousand boxes, all the balls in the thousand boxes are cleared, One box is added, and two boxes are displayed (second box for both boxes).

  In this example of the display screen, the display of the ball capacity (first predetermined image) of a thousand boxes is increased by one for every 1000 balls, but when the number of possession balls reaches 10,000, the ball capacity of the thousand boxes is increased. The (first predetermined image) is not displayed, and both boxes (second predetermined image) are newly displayed.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the displayed ball capacity (first predetermined image) of the thousand boxes is not hidden, and the display of the ball capacity (first predetermined image) of the thousand boxes is continued. In this case, a new box (second predetermined image) may be displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating another example of the display screen of the possessed sphere special display displayed on the first display unit 430. Here, the case where the ball volume of a pachinko ball stacked in one ball box as the first predetermined image is displayed and the ball volume of a pachinko ball stacked in another ball box as the second predetermined image is illustrated. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 10,000 shots is illustrated.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one pachinko ball is displayed in the first box (first ball bulk display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two pachinko balls are displayed on the first box (second ball bulk display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, three pachinko balls are displayed in the first box (third ball display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, pachinko balls are displayed in the first box. Four balls are displayed (fourth ball volume display step).

  Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9000, nine pachinko balls are displayed in the first box (the ninth ball bulk display step). When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, ten pachinko balls are displayed in the first box. At this time, since the pachinko balls are no longer stacked in the first box, the second box is displayed (the tenth ball display stage).

  The same applies to the following. When the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one pachinko ball is displayed in the second box (11th ball-bulk display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 20000, ten pachinko balls are displayed on the second box. At this time, since no more pachinko balls are stacked in the second box, the third box is displayed (the 20th ball display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box is incremented by one for every 1000 balls possessed, and when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, The display of the ball volume (first predetermined image) of the stacked ball box is left as it is (continue), and the ball volume (second predetermined image) of the next ball box is newly displayed.

  In addition, when the increase in the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000 shots, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box stacked first is not continued, and the ball bulk of the ball box stacked first ( The first predetermined image) may be hidden and the ball volume (second predetermined image) of the next ball box may be newly displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

[3-9. Effect]
In the third gaming system 1A, a data display device 4, which is a kind of gaming device, is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 that plays using pachinko balls. The data display device 4 includes a first display unit 430 that can display an image and a third communication unit that receives a possessed ball signal from the inter-counter counting unit 3 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 executes display control to display the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 when the number of possessed balls specified based on the possessed ball signal reaches the first display threshold. Even if the number of possessed balls falls below the first display threshold when the first predetermined image is displayed on the first display unit 430, the first non-display threshold is reached if the first non-display threshold is reached by a predetermined number smaller than the first display threshold. When the predetermined image is not hidden and is below the first non-display threshold, non-display control is executed to hide the first predetermined image.

  According to this, by displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 based on the number of balls possessed by the player, the game state of the player can be given to the player playing the game machine and the surrounding players. It is possible to notify (the number of game media possessions) in an easily understandable form. Further, the first non-display threshold value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the threshold difference for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed balls just before the threshold.

[3-10. Modified example]
The possessed ball special display control process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is not limited to the process described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, a modified example of the possessed ball special display control process will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of the second possessed ball special display control process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 in place of the possessed ball special display control process of FIG.

  The possessed sphere special display control unit 415 calculates the first unit sphere number = the possessed sphere number− (first display counter value × first display threshold value) (F1). Also, the possessed sphere special display control unit 415 calculates the second unit sphere number = the possessed sphere number− (second display counter value × second unit sphere number) (F3). Here, the first unit ball number is a possessed ball number normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 1000 shots in order to enable threshold determination using the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value. The second unit ball count is a possessed ball count normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 5000 shots in order to enable threshold determination using the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value.

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the first unit ball number has reached the first display threshold (F5). If it is determined that it has reached (F5; Yes), the first display 1 is added to the counter value (F7). Then, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the second unit ball number has reached the second display threshold (F9), and if it is determined that it has reached (F9; Yes), the second display Control is performed so that the number of second predetermined images corresponding to the counter value is displayed on the first display unit 430 (F11).

  Next, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 performs control to delete all the first predetermined images from the first display unit 430 (F13). The possessed ball special display control unit 415 adds 1 to the second display counter value (F15), resets the first display counter value (F17), and ends the second possessed ball special display control process. .

  If it is determined in F9 that the second unit ball number has not reached the second display threshold value (F9; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 has a number of first predetermined images corresponding to the first display counter value. Is displayed on the first display unit 430 (F19). Then, the second possessed ball special display control process ends.

  If it is determined in F5 that the first unit ball count has not reached the first display threshold value (F5; No), the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether the first unit ball count has fallen below the first non-display threshold value. It is determined whether or not (F21).

  If it is determined that the first number of unit balls has fallen below the first non-display threshold (F21; Yes), the possessed sphere special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the first display counter value is 0 (F23). If it is determined that it is not 0 (F23; No), 1 is subtracted from the first display counter value (F25). Then, control is performed to display the number of first predetermined images corresponding to the first display counter value on the first display unit 430 (F27).

  Thereafter, the possessed ball special display control unit 415 determines whether or not the second unit ball number has fallen below the second non-display threshold (F29). If it is determined that the value is lower (F29; Yes), it is determined whether the second display counter value is 0 (F31). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (F31; No), the second display is performed. 1 is subtracted from the counter value (F33). And after performing control which displays the 2nd predetermined image of the number according to the 2nd display counter value on the 1st display part 430 (F35), the 2nd possessed ball special display control processing is ended.

  Also by performing such second possessed ball special display control processing, the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are appropriately displayed / hidden according to the number of possessed balls of the player, and a game is played on the gaming machine. It is possible to inform the player and surrounding players of the player's gaming state (the number of possessed game media) in an easy-to-understand manner.

[2. Fourth Embodiment]
[4-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a fourth gaming system 1B in the fourth embodiment. The fourth gaming system 1B is a plurality of pachinko machines 2 which are a kind of gaming machines installed on a game island (not shown), and a kind of gaming apparatus and counting device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2. Card unit 3, hall computer 6 which is a kind of control device and management device, holding ball management computer 8 which is a kind of control device and management device, and gaming apparatus and information provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2 A call lamp device 9 which is a kind of display device is provided.

  The card unit 3 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2, and is issued to a visitor player who is not registered as a member in the game hall. A visitor card, which is a recording medium for use, or a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall, is accepted, and the visitor card or membership card (hereinafter, “ A game medium used for a game in the pachinko machine 2 based on the value of the valuable value (prepaid balance) specified from the game value identification information (prepaid balance data) recorded in the card). Count the pachinko balls acquired in the process for renting out a certain pachinko ball or a game in the pachinko machine 2 and pay the pachinko balls within the number of pachinko balls already counted. Vinegar processing is performed.

  The calling lamp device 9 is a kind of information display device that has a horizontally long box shape when viewed from the front. The calling lamp device 9 is used by a player playing a game on the pachinko machine 2 to call a store clerk. The game information related to the pachinko machine 2 is displayed on the display unit (display) provided on the front surface.

  Each pachinko machine 2 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and the pachinko machine 2, the card unit 3, and the calling lamp device 9 are connected to the hall computer 6 and the holding ball management computer 8 through the machine terminal. ing. In FIG. 1, for the sake of simplicity, four pachinko machines 2 installed on the amusement island are illustrated.

[4-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of information and signals between the devices of the fourth gaming system 1B.

  From the pachinko machine 2, signals related to the game such as a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a time-shortage signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal are output to the calling lamp device 9 and the hall computer 6.

  From the card unit 3, a possessed ball signal indicating the number of possessed balls of the player counted by the counting payout unit 380 and a card discharge signal are output to the calling lamp device 9. Further, the card unit 3 outputs the card information recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card to the possession management computer 8.

  Further, the hall computer 6 outputs a display instruction signal for causing the display unit of the calling lamp device 9 to perform a predetermined display.

[4-3. Configuration of pachinko machine and card unit]
FIG. 48 is a front view showing the external configuration of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, since the structure of the pachinko machine 2 is the same as 3rd Embodiment, it abbreviate | omits description again.

  On the front surface of the card unit 3, a multi-function lamp 301 that is configured by a full color LED and is lit in a plurality of colors so that the state of the card unit 3 can be notified, and a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill. A protrusion 305 formed to protrude from the front side of the apparatus to the front side of the apparatus, a payout button 311 for receiving a counting payout operation for paying out the counted number of balls, and a card for inserting a membership card or a visitor card An insertion port 309 is provided.

  A card insertion slot 309 provided on the front surface of the card unit 3 is connected to a card slot 392 of a card reader / writer 327 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 309, and the card insertion slot 309 is connected via the card insertion slot 309. The visitor card and the membership card can be inserted into the card slot 392.

  Here, in the visitor card and the membership card, a non-volatile memory for storing various data and control for rewriting and reading out the recorded information and non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device. An IC card on which an IC chip having a card portion is mounted is used, and in these visitor cards and member cards, card IDs that can identify individual cards are stored in advance so as not to be rewritten. The type can be identified from the card ID, and various data such as prepaid balance data that can specify the prepaid balance and a distribution flag that can specify the presence or absence of distribution are stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, as will be described later, the member player using the membership card may use the pachinko balls acquired and counted once again for the game after the next day, or to store the balls that can be used for prize exchange. However, the number of stored balls, which is the number of pachinko balls in which the stored balls have been stored, is not directly recorded on the membership card, and the number of stored balls is determined by the holding ball management computer as will be described later. In FIG. 8, the member card ID and the member ID are stored in association with each other, so that the member card ID and the member ID are specified.

  Also, the membership card does not directly record the number of balls based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the membership card. By being stored in association with the member ID, it is specified from the member card ID or the member ID, and the number of possessed balls can be used in the game at each card unit 3 in the game hall only on that day. It can be used, and can be used for prize exchange at a prize exchange POS terminal (not shown).

  The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / payment machine (not shown) installed in the amusement hall, and is also issued by the card unit 3. The visitor card stores the number of balls and date based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the visitor card, and the number of balls is stored only on the day of the game. The card unit 3 can be used for games and can be used for prize exchange at the prize exchange POS terminal.

  Further, a protruding portion 305 is provided on the front surface of the card unit 3 so as to protrude forward. On the surface of the protrusion 305 facing the player, a display unit 340 capable of displaying various information, a menu button 316 for displaying a main menu screen, and a table data button 318 for displaying table data. And a replay button 319 for executing a replay game using the membership card ID recorded on the membership card and the number of balls specified by the membership ID when the membership card is received, A replay display unit 320 for informing that the operation of the game is valid, an IR light receiving unit 315 that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller for setting possessed by an attendant of the game hall, converts it into an electrical signal, and outputs it. Is provided on the surface of the display unit 340 so that each display item displayed on the display unit 340 can be input with a finger. Akira touch panel 314 is provided.

  In addition, a switch corresponding to a later-described liquid crystal display 313 and each bonn constituting the display unit 340 are provided in the protrusion 305, and these are provided at positions in the apparatus corresponding to the protrusion 305. By being connected to the display control board 329, display control of the liquid crystal display 313, input position detection by the transparent touch panel 314, and the like are performed by the display control board 329.

  At the upper position in the card unit 3, a banknote inserted in the banknote insertion slot 302 is connected, and a bill inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken to identify its authenticity and banknote type. A bill recognition unit 302 that outputs to a control unit 305, which will be described later, is provided in the section. In the bill recognition unit 302, various bills (10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, 1,000 yen each) (Banknotes) can be accepted.

  In addition, a control unit 305 for controlling the operation of the card unit 3 is provided at a substantially central position of the card unit 3 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the card unit 3, as will be described later. Various operations of the card unit 3 are controlled by the control unit 305.

  Also, at the lowermost position of the card unit 3, a pachinko ball is counted and taken in, and the counted pachinko ball is the maximum fraction, that is, a fraction of less than 25 units which is a payout unit in the corresponding pachinko machine 2 is less than 25 units. There is provided a counting payout unit 380 that stores only the maximum value of 24 and counts and pays out pachinko balls having a fraction less than the unit.

[4-4. Functional configuration of card unit]
FIG. 49 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the card unit 3.
The card unit 3 is a control unit that provides various functions of the card unit 3 by controlling each part of the bill identifying unit 302, the card reader / writer 327, the display control board 329, and the card unit 3 by a control program. The bill recognition unit 302, the card reader / writer 327, and the display control board 329 are connected to the control unit 305 so that various data can be transmitted and received.

  The card reader / writer 327 reads and writes recorded information such as (member) card ID, member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, and the like recorded in the member card and visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 309. I do.

  The control unit 305 includes a CPU 310, a ROM 320, a RAM 330, and an RTC 340.

  The CPU 310 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control the card unit 3. In the present embodiment, the CPU 310 includes a possessed ball special display control unit 311 as a main functional unit.

  The ROM 320 is a nonvolatile read-only storage device. The ROM 320 includes a CU processing program 321 that is read by the CPU 310 and executed as a CU process (see FIGS. 53 and 54), and a possessed ball special display threshold table 322. I remember it.

  The CU processing program 321 includes a possessed sphere special display control program 321a executed as a possessed sphere special display control process as a subroutine. The CU process will be described later in detail using a flowchart. Moreover, about the possessed ball special display control process, since the possessed ball special display control process (refer FIG. 37) demonstrated in 3rd Embodiment is applicable as it is, description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted. The possessed sphere special display threshold value table 322 can be applied with the possessed sphere special display threshold value table 494 (see FIG. 31) described in the third embodiment as it is, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The RAM 330 is a volatile readable / writable storage device, and the (member) card ID of the visitor card or membership card being received by the card reader / writer 327 and the prepaid balance, the number of possessions, the number of savings, the number of points visited, etc. Various data such as base data of the pachinko machine 2 to be played and game information of members playing the game are stored. The RAM 330 is backed up by a battery (not shown) and retains data stored for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off.

The RAM 330 stores card data 331 and processing data 332.
The processing data 332 is processing data for the CPU 310 to perform the possessed ball special display in the possessed ball special display control process (see FIG. 37), and the first display counter value, the second display counter value, the first Data for processing such as an integer n and a second integer m is temporarily stored.

  As described above, the control unit 305 is connected to the prize ball control board (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 2 so as to be able to exchange various signals accompanying the lending of the pachinko balls. As described above, by connecting to the information output board of the pachinko machine 2 via the signal cable, various external output signals such as a big hit signal can be input.

  Further, the control unit 305 is connected to an out ball counter 16 provided at a lower position of the corresponding pachinko machine 2 so that a driving ball signal from the out ball counter 16 can be input. In response to the input of the shot ball signal from the ball counter 16, a predetermined number corresponding to the shot ball signal is added and updated to the value of the total shot ball number in the game information table described later.

  The control unit 305 is connected to the count payout unit 380, and receives a count sensor signal output when the pachinko balls are counted in the count payout unit 380, and based on the count sensor signal Update the number of possessed balls. For example, as described above, a pachinko ball that has flowed into the count payout unit 380 is detected by a counting sensor, and a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is sent from the count payout unit 380 to the control unit 305 in response to the detection of one pachinko ball. The number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) that is output and stored in the control unit 305 increases by one. The configuration of the counting / dispensing unit 380 is the same as that of the counting / dispensing unit 380 provided in the inter-counter counting unit 3 of the third embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The control unit 305 is connected to a payout button switch 311 ′ corresponding to the payout button 311 provided at a position below the protrusion 305 on the front surface of the apparatus, and a signal corresponding to the operation of the payout button 311 By inputting from the button switch 311 ′, it is possible to grasp whether or not the payout button 311 is operated. When it is detected that the payout button 311 has been pressed, the control unit 305 pays out a predetermined number of unit balls out of the number of possessed balls to the player. As in the third embodiment, the description will be made assuming that the number of unit balls repaid to the player by one rebate operation is 125. The control unit 305 subtracts 125 from the stored number of possessed balls every time a refund operation is performed. However, if the refund operation is performed when the number of possessed balls is less than 125, the number of possessed balls is set to zero. That is, the number of balls corresponding to the stored number of possessed balls is subtracted.

  As in the third embodiment, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the pachinko balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 are counted from the lower plate 24 by keeping the counting lever 341 pulled by the player. When the player flows into the passage 343 at any time and increases at any time by being counted by the counting / dispensing unit 380, the player accumulated the pachinko balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341 on the lower plate. When the pachinko balls are collected to some extent, the counting lever 341 is pulled, so that the accumulated pachinko balls flow into the counting passage 343 at once, and are counted by the counting dispensing unit 380 to increase at once. There are two cases. Further, when the number of balls possessed by the player decreases, the pachinko ball is refunded to the player by the player's refund operation, and as described above, the number of refunds by one refund operation is 125 shots. The number of possessed balls decreases by 125 by one refund operation.

  Further, as described above, the control unit 305 includes a remaining amount indicator provided in the operation unit of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, a lending button switch for detecting the operation of the lending button, a member card or a visitor card being received. A return button switch that detects the operation of the return button that is operated when returning the item is connected, and the operation of the lending button and the operation of the return button can be detected, and the display control of these remaining amount indicators is performed.

  The control unit 305 outputs various information input from the display control board 329 in response to an output from the IR light receiving unit 315 in response to transmission from the remote controller, an operation of various buttons provided on the protrusion 305, or an operation of the touch panel. The full color provided in the multifunction lamp connected to the control unit 305 in response to the currency identification information by the banknote identification unit 302, the card insertion information from the card reader / writer 327, the visitor card storage state information, etc. Overall operation control is performed such as lighting control of each LED such as the LED 301a, control of the card reader / writer 327 and the display control board 329, display control of the balance indicator, and the like.

  Further, the control unit 305 is based on a card acceptance process for determining whether or not a member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 can be used, or based on prepaid balance data read from the member card or visitor card being accepted. Depending on the lending process that uses the prepaid balance and the receipt of money, the prepaid balance remaining on the member card or visitor card being accepted is received, or the prepaid balance is written to a new visitor card and issued. Issuance / payment processing, return processing to return the member card or visitor card being accepted by return operation by return button, replay processing using the number of stored balls, and counting the number of balls counted by accepting the operation of the payout button 311 (insertion) (Including the number of balls specified by the visitor card and membership card) Went the payout La (return) to execute the processing of the payout processing for subtraction update the number of balls that issued 該払 from the counting finished ball number.

  The control unit 305 is connected to an external device such as the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8 connected to the local area network (LAN) via the communication unit 334 and the HUB so that data communication is possible. Various data can be transmitted to and received from each of these computers through the communication unit.

  The display control board 329 connected to the control unit 305 includes a liquid crystal display 313 that forms the display unit 340, a transparent touch panel 314, various switches (a menu switch 316a corresponding to the menu button 316, and a base data button 318). The corresponding table data switch 318a, the replay switch 319a corresponding to the replay button 319), the IR light receiving unit 315, and the electronic components such as the LED 320a provided in the replay display unit 320 are connected. Information based on the operation information of the transparent touch panel 314, the operation information of various switches, and the output signal output from the IR light receiving unit 315 is output to the control unit 305 via the display control board 329.

  The display control board 329 of the present embodiment specifies a display driving circuit (not shown) that performs display driving of the liquid crystal display 313 and a position that is pressed based on an output signal from the transparent touch panel 314, and An input position detection circuit (not shown) that outputs the specified input position information, a VDP (not shown) that performs processing related to a display image displayed on the display unit 340, a VROM that stores image data used for menu display, etc. (Not shown), VRAM (not shown) for temporarily storing display data to be displayed on the display unit 340, and determination and processing associated with inputs from various switches and touch panels, etc., independently from the control unit 305. Based on display data (page data) output from the control unit 305, etc. The display screen, and is capable of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 313 constituting the display unit 340.

  The card unit 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member game registered as a member in the game hall. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a person, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 3 that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of possessed balls, or the number of stored balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into a game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, on the front surface of the card unit 3, there are provided a bill insertion slot for inserting bills and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting member cards and visitor cards. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port is received by the card reader / writer, and the information recorded on the card is read. The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  Further, on the front surface of the card unit 3, when a member card is received, the card unit 3 is specified by a member card ID (hereinafter simply referred to as “card ID”) and a card ID recorded on the member card. A replay button for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls is provided.

  The display unit displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card). This display can display the number of game balls and other various information, and the surface is composed of a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be performed by touching various display items displayed on the display of the display with a finger. Can be configured.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the managed ball management computer 8, a part of the stored ball is withdrawn and the game It is converted into a ball and a game with the pachinko machine 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. Separately from the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the possessed ball may be provided, and the replay button may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The stored ball is a game medium deposited in the game hall and is managed by the possession ball management computer 8.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that are recorded by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is. In general, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited at the amusement hall is called “stored ball”. say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine, and is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a holding ball, or a stored ball.

  Note that the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall after being operated to store in the amusement hall, or have not yet been deposited in the amusement park Therefore, “mochitama” may be managed by the possessionball management computer 8 installed in the store.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in association with the member card number in the possession management computer 8 installed in the store so that the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. It is configured. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the possession management computer 8 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the possession balls may be stored in the possession management computer 8 in association with the card numbers.

  In addition, the timing which memorize | stores the possession ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or the possession management computer 8 is good also as a timing whenever a count button is operated and count processing is performed, or as a timing for every fixed time. It is also possible to return the card.

  When the player finishes the game and receives a card return from the card unit 3, the ball stored in the card unit 3 is temporarily stored in the ball management computer 8 as a stored ball, and the player When the card is inserted again into the same or another card unit 3 on the same day as when the card was returned, only the possession balls for that day that were once stored as stored balls are again stored in the card unit 3, The game balls may be added within the range of the possession balls so that the game can be played.

  A lending button 321 and a card return button 322 are provided on the front surface of the card unit 3.

  The lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the pachinko machine 2. That is, it is an operation button for the player to pay back the pachinko ball.

  The card return button 322 is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion−the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

[4-5. Functional configuration of Mochitama management computer]
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the possession management computer 8.
The possession management computer 8 includes a processing unit 810, an operation unit 820, a display unit 830, a sound output unit 835, a communication unit 840, a clock unit 850, and a storage unit 860.

  The processing unit 810 is a control device and an arithmetic device that collectively control each unit of the ball management computer 8 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 860, and includes a processor such as a CPU. Composed.

  The operation unit 820 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 810.

  The display unit 830 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 810, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 830 displays data contents of various databases stored in the storage unit 860.

  The sound output unit 835 is a sound output device that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 810. From the sound output unit 835, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying an administrator of a warning or the like when a warning is issued or an abnormality occurs is output.

  The communication unit 840 is a communication device for performing communication with the card unit 3 and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The communication unit 840 receives card information from the card unit 3.

  The clock unit 850 is an internal clock included in the holding ball management computer 8 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including date) of the clock unit 850 is output to the processing unit 810 as needed.

  The storage unit 860 stores a possession management program 861 executed as a possession management process by the processing unit 810, member data 863, card management data 865, and unit management data 867.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the data structure of the member data 863. As shown in FIG. The member data 863 stores member information data and member game history data. The member information data stores member personal information. Specifically, for example, according to a member ID for uniquely identifying a member, a personal identification number set by the member, a visit point given to the member every time he / she visits a store, and a store point The rank set for the member, the last name of the member, and the name of the member are stored.

  In the member game history data, a member ID, a visit date, a machine number, a model name, a start time, and an end time are stored in association with each other. The start time is the time when the member starts playing the game with the pachinko machine 2 having the serial number. The end time is the time when the member ends the game with the pachinko machine 2 with the serial number.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the card management data 865.
The card management data 865 stores member card management data and visitor card management data.

  The membership card management data is data for managing the membership card. For example, the card ID for uniquely identifying the membership card, the membership ID, and the number of balls (4 yen holding ball and 1 yen holding ball). Number), the number of stored balls (the number of 4-yen stored balls and the number of 1-yen stored balls), and the number of jackpots are stored in association with each other. Here, the part that stores (manages) the number of stored balls in association with the member ID corresponds to the stored ball DB of the member management apparatus 162 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

  The visitor card management data is data for managing visitor cards. For example, the card ID for making the visitor card unique, the latest issue date and time that is the latest issue date and time of the visitor card, and the number of possessions ( 4 yen holding balls and 1 yen holding balls) and the number of jackpots are stored in association with each other.

[4-6. Process flow]
53 and 54 are flowcharts showing the flow of CU processing (card unit processing) executed by the CPU 310 of the card unit 3 in accordance with the CU processing program 321 stored in the ROM 320.

  First, the CPU 310 determines whether or not a card return operation has been performed (H1). If it is determined that a card return operation has been performed (H1; Yes), a card return process is performed (H3). Specifically, a process of discharging the inserted card to the card return slot is performed. Then, the CPU 310 shifts the process to H21.

  In this card return process, it is possible to select a loan rate for the number of stored balls and the number of balls to be returned. In this example, since the lending rate of the card unit 3 is 4 yen, the number of accumulated balls and the number of held balls are usually returned at 4 yen. However, when the lending rate of 1 yen is selected, the number of accumulated balls and the number of held balls Will be returned for 1 yen. In addition, by setting in advance, the number of stored balls and the number of balls may be returned forcibly for 1 yen or 4 yen. Here, if the card unit 3 has a lending rate of 1 yen but is returned at 4 yen, a fraction that cannot be converted to a 4 yen stored or held number will be generated in the 1 yen stored or held number. However, the fraction may be paid out or discarded depending on the setting.

  If it is determined that the card returning operation has not been performed (H1; No), the CPU 310 determines whether or not the holding ball summing operation has been performed (H5), and if it is determined that it has been performed (H5; Yes), the holding ball Addition processing is performed (H7). Then, the CPU 310 shifts the process to H21.

  If it is determined that the coin holding operation has not been performed (H5; No), the CPU 310 determines whether or not a card lock operation has been performed (H9). If it is determined that the card lock operation has been performed (I9; Yes), the card lock is performed. Processing is performed (H11). Specifically, the inserted card is locked so that it cannot be returned only by pressing the card return button 322. After the lock, for example, the player is requested to input a password, and the card is not returned to the player unless the correct password is input. Then, the CPU 310 shifts the process to H21.

  If it is determined that a card lock operation has not been performed (H9; No), the CPU 310 determines whether or not a ball split operation has been performed (H13). If it is determined that a ball lock operation has been performed (H13; Yes), the CPU 310 Division processing is performed (H15). Then, the CPU 310 shifts the process to H21.

  If it is determined that the holding ball division operation has not been performed (H13; No), the CPU 310 determines whether or not an information inquiry operation has been performed (H17). If it is determined that the information inquiry operation has been performed (H17; Yes), the information inquiry Processing is performed (H19). Specifically, in accordance with the player's operation, information such as the prepaid balance (payment balance), the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls, etc. is displayed on the display unit 330. Then, the CPU 310 shifts the process to H21.

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not a counting result has been input from the counting payout unit 380 (H21), and if it is determined that it has been input (H21; Yes), the possessed ball number data 331a is updated (H23). Then, the CPU 310 executes a possessed sphere special display control process (see FIG. 37) according to the possessed sphere special display control program 321a stored in the ROM 320 (H25).

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the replay button 319 has been pressed (H27). If it is determined that the replay button 319 has been pressed (H27; Yes), the ball payout control process is performed (H29). Then, after updating the possessed ball number data 331a (H31), the CPU 310 executes a possessed ball special display control process (see FIG. 37) according to the possessed ball special display control program 321a stored in the ROM 320 (H33).

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not a “storing ball conversion button” (not shown) displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 has been pressed (H35). If it is determined that the button has been pressed (H35; Yes), Processing is performed (H37). This storage ball conversion process is substantially the same as the conversion process described with reference to FIG. 7, but since the lending rate of the card unit 3 of this example is 4 yen, conversion from the 1-yen stored-ball number to the 4-yen stored-ball number is performed. In the figure, “4 yen stored ball number” is read as “1 yen stored ball number”, and “1 yen stored ball number” is read as “4 yen stored ball number”.

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not a “ball change button” (not shown) displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 is pressed (H39), and if it is determined that it is pressed (H39; Yes), Ball conversion processing is performed (H41). 7 is substantially the same as the conversion process described in FIG. 7, but since the lending rate of the card unit 3 in this example is 4 yen, the number of 1-yen coins is changed from 4 yen Conversion is performed, and “4 yen stored ball number” in the figure is read as “1 yen held ball number”, and conversely “1 yen stored ball number” is read as “4 yen held ball number”.

  In the storage ball conversion process and the possession ball conversion process, the conversion from 1 yen to 4 yen is performed, and thus S107 and S108 are applied. In addition, in S101, in addition to all or part of the processing of deposit, ball lending, savings replay, and card return, the total of the ball (H7), the ball split (H15), and all or part of the count The process is locked, and the locked process is released in S120. As in the first embodiment, the conversion is locked during the processing of the total ball total, the total ball split, and the counting.

  Thereafter, the CPU 310 determines whether or not to end the process (H43). If it is determined to continue the process (H43; No), the process returns to H1. Moreover, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (H43; Yes), a card unit process will be complete | finished.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the flow of the holding ball summing process.
The possession ball summing process is a process of summing up the possession balls associated with a plurality of cards and associating them with one card.

  The CPU 310 determines whether or not a membership card is being accepted (J3). When the membership card is being received (J3; Yes), the CPU 310 instructs the input of a personal identification number (J5). Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not the collation result is OK (J7), and if it is OK (J7; Yes), the CPU 310 determines whether or not the membership card has a ball (J9).

  If it is determined that there is a holding ball (J9; Yes), the CPU 310 invalidates the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 327 and discharges the membership card (J11). Then, the CPU 310 instructs the player to insert a membership card or a visitor card (J13).

  Next, the CPU 310 determines whether or not a card is inserted within a predetermined time (J15). If it is determined that the card is inserted (J15; Yes), the holding ball is transferred to the inserted card (J17). Then, the CPU 310 transmits the card information of the inserted card to the possession management computer 8 (J19), and then ejects the inserted card (J21). Then, the CPU 310 ends the possession ball summing process.

  When the determination result of J3, J7, J9, or J15 is a negative determination, the CPU 310 performs error notification (J23). Then, the CPU 310 ends the possession ball summing process.

  It should be noted that the lending rate (4 yen or 1 yen) of the coins to be summed may be selected in the possession ball summing process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ball splitting process.
The internal ball splitting process is a process of splitting the internal ball of one card (dividing source card) and associating it with a plurality of cards. In the present embodiment, some of the possessed balls of the accepted membership cards (hereinafter referred to as “dividing source cards”) are referred to as other new visitor cards (hereinafter referred to as “dividing destination cards”). ), And the remaining possession balls are left on the original card.

  First, the CPU 310 gives an instruction to input a personal identification number (K3). Next, it is determined whether or not the collation result is OK (K5), and if it is determined that it is OK (K5; Yes), whether or not the holding ball is more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. Is determined (K7). When the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (K7; No), since it is usually not possible to pay out the possessed balls, the number of possessed balls is combined with the amount of the card to be divided. Need to be at least twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount.

  If it determines with it being 2 times or more (K7; Yes), CPU310 will display-control the screen for inputting the number of balls to divide | segment (K9). The number of divisions can be selected from choices, or can be input by increasing or decreasing the number of units corresponding to the lending unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or a numerical value can be directly input You may do it.

  The CPU 310 waits until the number of divisions is input (K11; No), and if it is determined that it has been input (K11; Yes), it determines whether the membership card is being accepted (K13). If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (K13; Yes), the CPU 310 subtracts the number of divisions from the number of possessed balls (K15).

  Next, the CPU 310 discharges the membership card (K17). Next, the CPU 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit provided in the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs the issued visitor card issue process (K19). Specifically, the status of the visitor saving management table of the possession management computer 8 is changed during use, the latest issue date is updated, and the latest issue date of the visitor saving management table of the possession management computer 8 is updated. Reset other items in both tables.

  Then, the CPU 310 associates the number of divisions with the visitor card as the number of balls (K21). Specifically, the number of divisions is stored as the number of balls in the visitor saving management table of the ball management computer 8. Next, the CPU 310 discharges the visitor card (K23).

  Next, the CPU 310 notifies that the member card that has been ejected is urged to be reinserted (K25). The CPU 310 waits until the membership card is inserted (K27; Yes), and if inserted (K27; Yes), transmits the card information to the possession management computer 8 (K41). Then, the CPU 310 ends the possession ball dividing process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (K13; No), the CPU 310 temporarily saves the card information of the visitor card being accepted to another memory area (K29). Then, the CPU 310 resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted and performs the issuing process (K31). Next, the CPU 310 records the number of divisions as the number of balls on the visitor card (K33), and discharges the visitor card (K35).

  Next, the CPU 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs the issued visitor card issue process (K37). Then, the CPU 310 records the card information saved in K29 on the visitor card (K39). Then, the CPU 310 shifts the process to K41.

  In addition, in the ball splitting process, the loan rate (4 yen or 1 yen) of the ball to be split may be selectable.

[4-7. Display screen]
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 313 of the card unit 3.
The liquid crystal display 313 displays a special possessed ball display corresponding to the number of possessed balls of the player and the number of possessed balls.

  The possessed ball special display is a special display corresponding to the player's possessed ball, and FIG. 57 shows a state in which a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image. Since the display method of these images is the same as that of the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Note that the display modes of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are not limited to FIG. 57, and various display modes as shown in FIGS. 42 to 44 in the third embodiment can be applied. .

  The number of possessed balls is the current number of possessed balls of the player, and is updated and displayed in real time based on the count result output from the count payout unit 380 and the number of payouts paid out by the player.

[4-8. Effect]
In the 4th game system 1B, the card unit 3 is provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 which plays using a pachinko ball. The card unit 3 includes a display unit 340 that can display an image, and a counting payout unit 380 that can count the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2. Then, the display control board 329 displays the first predetermined image on the display unit 340 when the possessed ball count counted by the counting payout unit 380 reaches the first display threshold, and the display unit 340 If the number of possessed balls has reached a first non-display threshold that is a predetermined number of times smaller than the first display threshold when the first predetermined image is displayed, the first predetermined image is not hidden and the first non-display threshold When the value is lower than, non-display control for making the first predetermined image non-display is executed.

  According to this, by counting the number of possessed balls of the player who plays with the gaming machine by the counting payout unit 380 and displaying the first predetermined image on the display unit 340 based on the counted possessed number of balls, the player's An intuitive and easy-to-understand display showing the number of possessed balls can be realized. In addition, the first non-display threshold for hiding the first predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold for displaying the first predetermined image. By providing the threshold difference for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed balls just before the threshold.

[4-9. Modified example]
In the ball totaling process and the ball splitting process executed by the card unit 3, an exceptional process related to the possessed ball special display may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the possessed ball is divided by the possessed ball splitting process, the possession recorded on the original card based on the possessed ball number (the number of possessed balls) recorded on the card before the splitting. The number of images displayed in the number of spheres and the number of images displayed in the number of possessed spheres recorded on the card at the division destination may be determined.

For example, it is assumed that the number of possessed balls is 3100 and the player divides this into 1900 and 1200 shots. It is assumed that the number of possessed balls recorded on the division source card is 1900 and the number of retained balls recorded on the division destination card is 1200. According to the above possessed ball special display control process, when the number of possessed balls is 3100, the number of displayed first predetermined images is 3. Therefore, for example, the display number of the first predetermined image is distributed so that the sum of the display numbers of the first predetermined image is 3 between the division source card and the division destination card. Specifically, the number of held balls is 1900 for the split source card, but the display number of the first predetermined image in this case is exceptionally 2 and the number of held balls is 1200 for the split destination card. Therefore, as a general rule, the display number of the first predetermined image is set to 1.
The same applies to the second predetermined image.

  As a specific process, the display number of a predetermined image (hereinafter referred to as “total display number”) is determined based on the number of possessed balls recorded on the card before division. Then, when the possession ball division is performed, the number of possession balls recorded on each card is based on the possession ball number recorded on the division source card and the possession ball number recorded on the division destination card. The display counter value is determined.

  Display counter value corresponding to the number of possessed balls of the division source card (hereinafter referred to as “division source card display counter value”) and display counter value corresponding to the number of possession balls of the division destination card (hereinafter referred to as “division destination card display”). In the case where the sum of the counter value and the total display number is the same, the predetermined image is displayed based on the display counter value as it is. On the other hand, when the sum of the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value is different from the above total display number, the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value are compensated so as to compensate for the difference. Either one of them is corrected. This display counter value correction processing is performed for each of the first display counter value and the second display counter value.

  In this case, it is preferable to record the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value on the division source card and the division destination card, respectively. By doing in this way, when a player moves to another pachinko machine 2 and plays a game, the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the destination pachinko machine 2 is recorded on the received card. Based on the display counter value, the number of predetermined images to be displayed can be determined.

  In addition, when the possessed ball summing process is performed, the CPU 310 of the card unit 3 performs the possessed ball special display control process based on the number of possessed balls recorded in the accepted card, and the first display counter A value and a second display counter value are set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on these counter values.

  In addition, as with the ball splitting process, the display counter value corresponding to the number of possessed balls in the ball holding total process is recorded on the card, and the player moves to another pachinko machine 2 and plays a game. In this case, the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the destination pachinko machine 2 may determine the number of predetermined images to be displayed based on the display counter value recorded on the received card.

[3. Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 described in the third embodiment has a pachinko machine 2 in which a player has played, (1) the only game machine in which the player has played, (2 ) A long game machine in which the player's game time is longer than the first predetermined time; (3) the first game machine in which the player first played; (4) the player's game time longer than the second predetermined time; This is an embodiment in which information related to a total result of which one of one or more gaming models of short short-time gaming machines is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 described in the third embodiment displays the number of times that the pachinko ball has passed through the first area of the game area in the game on the pachinko machine 2 and This is an embodiment in which information on the total result obtained by counting the ratio and the number of times and / or the ratio that the pachinko ball has passed through the second area of the game area according to the firing intensity of the pachinko ball is displayed.

  The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 determines the game model that the player has played based on the card information recorded on the membership card inserted in the card unit 3 provided in the pachinko machine 2. Although illustration is omitted, in the card information, the game time of the player in the pachinko machine 2 is recorded for each ID of the pachinko machine 2 in association with the member ID. The game time includes a game start time at which a game on the pachinko machine 2 is started and a game end time at which a game on the pachinko machine 2 is ended. Based on these game times, the processing unit 410 determines which of the above game models (1) to (4) the game model played by the player is.

  An example of a game model determination method will be described. If there is only one pachinko machine 2 in which the member with the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 with that machine number is determined to be the only gaming machine. Among the pachinko machines 2 in which the member of the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 having a machine number longer than the first predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) is calculated as the time from the game start time to the game end time. Judged as a long-running game model. Among the pachinko machines 2 in which the member of the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 having a game number shorter than the second predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes) is calculated as the time from the game start time to the game end time. It is determined as a short-time gaming machine. Further, among the pachinko machines 2 in which the member with the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 having the oldest game start time is determined as the first game model.

  Based on the game model determination result, the processing unit 410 tabulates which game model the game model played by the player is, and stores the tabulation result in a database. Then, the processing unit 410 graphs, for example, the game models so that surrounding players can easily see the game models based on the total results of the game models stored in the database, and displays the created graph on the second display unit 440. To control.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In FIG. 65 (1), the second display unit 440 displays a pie chart (a model-specific long-time gaming machine ratio pie chart) that represents the percentage that the pachinko machine 2 has been played by the player as a long-time gaming machine. . FIG. 65 (2) shows a ratio of the pachinko machine 2 played by a player as a long-time game model (a long-term game model ratio bar graph by model) instead of the pie chart. A long-running game model ratio bar graph is displayed on the second display unit 440. By performing the graph display as described above on the second display unit 440, the surrounding players can know the proportion of games played for a long time on the pachinko machine 2.

  The above is an example of the display screen of the pie chart and bar graph created for the long-time gaming machine, but instead of this, the pie chart and bar graph created for the only gaming machine, the first gaming machine, and the short-time gaming machine are the first. You may make it display on 2 display part 440. FIG. By performing such a display, the surrounding players can know the rate at which the pachinko machine 2 is the only game, the first game, or the short game. It can be seen that the pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of long-time games is a popular model, and the only pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of games is a very popular model. It can also be seen that the pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of short-time games is a less popular model. Thereby, the surrounding player can judge a popular game model and a non-popular game model, and can refer to it when selecting the model to play.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440.
In FIG. 66 (1), for the model A of the pachinko machine 2, a pie chart showing the determination result of the game model that the player played is displayed on the second display unit 440. Specifically, for model A, the ratio of the player playing the first game, the ratio of playing for a short time, the ratio of playing for a long time, and the ratio of playing a single game are shown in a pie chart format.

This is shown in FIG. 66 (2) in the form of a bar graph. For model A, the percentage of players who played the game for the first time, the percentage of games played for a short time, the percentage of games played for a long time, and the ratio of the only games played It is displayed on the second display unit 440 in a bar graph format.
By performing such display, the surrounding players can know the percentage of the pachinko machine 2 that has been played as the only gaming model, long-time gaming model, first gaming model, and short-time gaming model. It can be determined whether the machine 2 is a popular model or an unpopular model.

  In the present embodiment, the launching device provided in the pachinko machine 2 includes a launch intensity sensor that detects the launch intensity of the pachinko ball, and the launch intensity sensor detects the launch intensity of the pachinko ball launched from the launch apparatus. To do. Then, a launch intensity signal indicating the detected launch intensity is output to the data display device 4. In addition, the pachinko machine 2 indicates that the pachinko ball passed through the winning opening when the pachinko ball driven into the game area passes through each winning opening (normal winning opening, starting winning opening, and large winning opening). The area signal is output to the data display device 4. At this time, the pachinko machine 2 outputs the pachinko ball firing strength in association with the passing area signal.

  The data display device 4 determines the launching intensity and passing area of the pachinko ball based on the launching intensity signal and passing area signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Based on the determination result, the number and / or ratio of the pachinko balls passing through the first area of the gaming area, and the number and / or ratio of the pachinko balls passing through the second area of the gaming area, Are calculated according to the firing strength of the pachinko balls. Here, in the first area and the second area, various winning holes for winning the pachinko ball (ordinary winning opening, starting winning opening, large winning opening) and divided driving areas in the gaming area (right hitting) Area, left-handed area, and inset area).

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of a firing intensity threshold range table used by the processing unit 410 to determine in which firing area a pachinko ball has been placed according to the firing intensity.
In the firing strength threshold range table, a driving area and a firing strength threshold range are stored in association with each other. The driving area is divided into, for example, a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. Here, the “right hit area” is an area on the right side of the game area, and the “left hit area” is an area on the left side of the game area. Further, the “bumping area” is an area where the pachinko balls are likely to flow toward the start winning opening when the pachinko balls are driven into this area.

  The firing intensity threshold range includes a firing intensity threshold range AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi) for the right strike area, and a firing intensity threshold range AL (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi) for the left strike area. The firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) is defined for each of the bump regions.

  The processing unit 410 adds up the total number of shots and the total shot ratio based on the launch intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Further, by determining which launch intensity threshold range of the launch intensity threshold range table the launch intensity specified from the launch intensity signal is determined, the hitting area of the pachinko ball is determined, and the determination result Based on this, the total number of driving and the total driving ratio are tabulated for each driving area.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the passage area data classified by the firing intensity collected by the processing unit 410.
The passing area data by launch intensity is data of the results of counting pachinko balls passing areas by launch intensity, and associates pachinko machine IDs with pachinko balls passing areas, total passes, and passes by launch intensity. The number-of-passage data by launch intensity and the passage ratio data by launch intensity in which the pachinko ball passage area, the total passage ratio, and the passage ratio by launch intensity are associated with each other are stored.

  In the passage area, a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, a third starting winning port, a first normal winning port, a second normal winning port, a third normal winning port and a large winning port are defined. In addition, the big prize opening includes a probability variation prize opening. Based on the launch intensity signal and the passage area signal output from the pachinko machine 2 for each prize opening, the total number of passages by passage area, the number of passages by launch intensity, the total passage ratio and the passage ratio by launch intensity are tabulated. It memorize | stores in the passage area data according to firing intensity.

  In the present embodiment, for each pachinko machine 2, it is described as counting both the number of passages by firing strength and the passage ratio by firing strength. However, only one of these may be counted. Good. That is, only the number of passages by firing intensity may be counted, or only the passage ratio by firing strength may be counted.

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of the data configuration of the shot area data for each firing intensity tabulated by the processing unit 410.
The firing area data by launching intensity is the data of the results of the pachinko ball placing area by launching intensity, the pachinko machine ID, the pachinko ball placing area, the total number of firings and the number of firings by launching intensity. And the number-of-injection-by-launch data according to the firing intensity and the driving-in ratio according to the firing intensity in which the driving area of the pachinko balls, the total driving-in ratio, and the driving-in ratio by the firing intensity are associated with each other.

  The driving area includes the right hit area, the left hit area, and the hit area described above. For each driving area, the processing unit 410 counts the total driving number and the total driving ratio based on the launch intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Further, by determining which launch intensity threshold range of the launch intensity threshold range table the launch intensity specified from the launch intensity signal is determined, the hitting area of the pachinko ball is determined, and the determination result Based on the driving area, the number of driving shots by firing strength and the driving rate by shooting strength are tabulated.

  In the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 2 is described as counting up both the number of shots by firing strength and the shot ratio by firing strength, but only one of these is tabulated. May be. That is, only the number of shots by firing strength may be counted, or only the shot ratio by firing strength may be tabulated.

  For example, the processing unit 410 may make it easier for the surrounding players to visually recognize the passing area according to the firing strength of the pachinko balls based on the result of counting the passing areas according to the firing strength (including the driving area). A control is performed to graph and display the created graph on the second display unit 440.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In FIG. 70 (1), a pie chart showing the percentage of winning to the start winning opening according to the firing intensity is displayed on the second display unit 440. Specifically, the ratio indicating the winning of the pachinko ball to the start winning opening is represented by the firing strength “T0 to T9” to the firing strength “T90 to T99”.

  This is shown in a bar graph format in FIG. 70 (2), and a bar graph showing the percentage of winning to the start winning opening for each firing intensity is displayed on the second display unit 440. By performing such a display, players other than the player tend to pass which area the pachinko ball passes through depending on the firing strength, and how much handle operation is performed, the pachinko ball will enter the starting prize opening. It is possible to grasp what can be done.

  In addition, you may make it display on the 2nd display part 440 in the form of a graph the information regarding the number and ratio of the pachinko ball which won not the start winning opening but the normal winning opening according to the firing intensity. Moreover, you may make it display on the 2nd display part 440 in the form of a graph the information regarding the pachinko ball and ratio which won the big prize opening according to launch intensity and the probability variation prize opening. Thereby, the surrounding player can grasp how much the handle operation is performed so that the pachinko ball can be awarded to the normal winning opening, the large winning opening, or the probability changing winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 has been described as counting game models. However, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 may perform counting of game models. In this case, the hall computer 6 may store the aggregation results in a database, and transmit the aggregation result data stored in the database to the data display device 4. Moreover, you may make it the coin management computer 8 totalize a game model. In addition, a member management computer that manages the member card may be installed in the store separately from the hall computer 6 and the possession management computer 8, and the member management computer may count the game models.

  Further, a computer having two or three functions among the hall computer 6, the ball management computer 8, and the member management computer may count the game models. That is, (1) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8, (2) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the member management computer, and (3) the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer. (4) Any one of the computers having the functions of the hall computer 6, the possession management computer 8 and the member management computer may count the game models.

  The same applies to the summation of the passage areas according to the firing intensities. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 does not perform the summation of the passage areas according to the firing intensities. You may make it total a passing area. In this case, the pachinko machine 2 may output the above-described launch intensity signal and passage region signal to the hall computer 6.

[6. Other Embodiments]
Embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the same structure as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as a normal pachinko machine 2, but it goes without saying that the gaming machine is not limited to this. As described above, instead of the normal pachinko machine 2, a sealed pachinko machine may be used as the gaming machine according to the present invention.

FIG. 58 is a front view showing an example of an external configuration of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B in this case.
The encapsulated pachinko machine 2B is pivotally supported by a housing formed on the front surface and one side (left side of the housing) so as to be rotatable up and down and detachable. An upper front frame 30A that is provided in a substantially integrated manner, and a lower front frame 30B that is positioned on the lower side of the upper front frame 30A and that is pivotally supported on one side of the housing and is detachably supported. And a display unit 60 disposed in front of the lower front frame 30B. In the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the upper front frame 30A, the lower front frame 30B, and the display unit 60 constitute a front frame of the gaming machine. The upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are provided separately, and the upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are not limited to those in which the display unit 60 is disposed in front of the lower front frame 30B. The display unit 60 may be disposed on the front surface of the integrated single front frame, or instead of or in addition to the lower front frame 30B, the display unit 60 is disposed on the front surface of the upper front frame 30A. May be.

  The upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are separated from each other, and the upper front frame 30A has bearings 31a and 31b attached to one side up and down, and hinges (not shown) of the housing of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B. It is pivotally attached to the casing by being pivotally supported by the part. A game board (gauge board) 20 constituting a game board surface is detachably attached to the upper front frame 30A. The game board 20 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 40A and a second special symbol display device 40B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 20 (for example, on the lower right edge of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 40A and the second special symbol display device 40B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 40A and the second special symbol display device 40B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 40A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 40B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 50 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 20. The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 50, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 40A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 40B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 50, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 40A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 40B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R in the image display device 50 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the image display device 50, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 40A or a special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 40B. In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (also simply referred to as “derivation”).

  For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) may be used for the decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R. The character image may be any combination of numbers, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters, symbols, and character images. , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 50, a start winning storage display area 50H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 50H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is made by the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 60A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the presence or the enclosed pachinko machine 2B being controlled to the big hit game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is done.

  Below the game area on the game board 20, an ordinary winning ball device 60A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 60B are provided. The normal winning ball device 60A forms, for example, a first start winning opening as a start area (first start area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 60B is an electric tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid (not shown). And a second start winning opening is formed in the start area (second start area).

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 60B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is normally open. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 60B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening (entrance) by tilting control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the on state. ) Easy to expand. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 60B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port by, for example, closing the second starting winning port in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 60A and a second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 60B is, for example, a first start opening switch (not shown) 2 Detected by starter switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, three) of the award balls is added to the current score, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined number. If the value is equal to or less than the upper limit value (eg, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 3) of the award balls is added to the current score, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined number. If it is less than or equal to the upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second start condition is satisfied. The number of points given based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch and the number of points awarded based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch are the same number. It may be a different number.

  A special variable winning ball device 70 is provided below the normal winning ball device 60A and the normal variable winning ball device 60B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 70 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown) for the large winning opening door, and the large winning opening as a specific region that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. Based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the big prize opening switch that detects the winning of a game ball to the big prize opening, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls is added to the current score. The Usually, the score given based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is set higher than the points awarded based on the winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening.

  In order to play a game with the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, first, a point card made of an IC card is inserted into the card insertion slot 28 provided on the side of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B. This point card can be purchased, for example, with a card vending machine installed in a game hall. The score card issued from the card vending machine includes a game hall code that can identify the game hall where the card is issued, identification information that can identify the score card from a plurality of score cards, and a score The card balance etc. in which the upper limit is determined according to the amount paid by the player at the time of card purchase are recorded.

  If a point card is inserted into the card insertion slot 28 and the ball lending switch is pressed, a predetermined number of points are awarded to the player in exchange for debiting a predetermined number of card balances from the card balance of the point card. . If the operation handle is operated in a state where a holding point is present, a hit ball (game medium) enclosed in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B is driven into the game area one by one by a hitting hammer (not shown). The shot balls that have been driven are detected one by one by a shot ball detector (not shown), and the score is decremented by one each time it is detected.

  The hit ball whose launch momentum is too weak to reach the game area is collected from the foul ball entrance and detected by a foul ball detector (not shown) provided on the back of the game board. Each time a foul ball is detected, one point is added and updated. Thereby, the score updated by subtraction can be effectively used again without obtaining an opportunity for the player's hit ball to reach the game area.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 26 provided in the game area is detected by a gate switch (not shown). After the normal chart start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display 20 uses the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal map start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous general chart game has ended. The figure game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal figure”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, after the first start condition is satisfied, for example, a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 60A is detected by a first start opening switch (not shown). Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 40A is started. In addition, after the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 60B is detected by a second start opening switch (not shown), for example, The special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 40B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to the previous special symbol game or the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 40A or the second special symbol display device 40B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the variable as the special symbol variation time set every time the special symbol game is performed. When the display time elapses, a fixed special symbol (special symbol display result) that is a variable symbol display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state. In these big hit gaming state and small hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 70 is controlled to be released a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), thereby making it possible to win a gaming ball in the big winning opening. That is, an opportunity to increase the score is provided. However, in the case of a small hit or a predetermined type of big hit (for example, the above-mentioned latent probability variation big hit), the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds), so that it is practically impossible to expect winning in the big winning opening. It has become.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R provided in the image display device 50, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 40A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 40B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R Then, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbols becoming a predetermined reach state or the reach state, the display operation in the image display device 50, the sound output operation by the speakers 80L and 80R, the game effect lamp A lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as 90 performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach state.

  When ending the game, the player presses the settlement switch. As a result, game-possible points (game balls) are recorded on the score card as updated information. In addition, in the case where there are prize exchange points (prize reward balls) in addition to the gameable points, the information may be recorded on the points card.

  If the prize exchange points previously acquired in the game have already been recorded on the score card, the prize exchange points are added and updated. In the above, in addition to the card balance, a possible game score (game ball) and a prize exchange score (prize score) are recorded in the score card. The scored card whose information has been rewritten is discharged from the card insertion slot 28.

  In the above-described encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, a game is played by holding points. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a possessed ball special display indicating the number of possessed balls of the player based on the player's points. In this case, the possessed ball special display can be displayed, for example, on the display unit 60 provided at the lower portion of the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B.

Specifically, every time a shot ball is detected by the shot ball detector, the score is subtracted, and every time a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detector, the score is added at any time. Update. In addition, as described above, when a game ball wins a winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, or other general winning opening), it corresponds to winning in the winning opening The score is updated as needed by adding the score to the score. Then, the number of possessed balls is determined based on the current possessed point, and a threshold value determination is performed with respect to the determined possessed ball number to control display / non-display of the predetermined image (the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image).
Instead of this, a threshold for the score is determined, and a threshold determination for the score is performed to display / hide a predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image) indicating the player's score. May be performed.

  As for the number of possessed balls (number of balls) counted by the inter-counter counting unit 5 of the third embodiment and the card unit 3 of the fourth embodiment, the pachinko balls that have flowed into the counting payout unit 380 are detected by the counting sensor. A detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting / dispensing unit 380 to the control unit 505 or the control unit 305 in response to the detection of one pachinko ball, and is stored in the control unit 505 or the control unit 305 accordingly. An example in which the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) increases by one has been described. That is, an example in which the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) immediately increases by 1 based on the detection of one pachinko ball has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the detection of one pachinko ball, the “counting ball number” is once updated without immediately updating the possessed ball number (the number of held balls) (1 (1) The “counting ball number” did not increase within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds), and (2) the increased “counting ball number” within the predetermined period becomes smaller than a predetermined value. (3) or based on a predetermined condition such as that the rate of increase of the “counting ball number” within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined rate, the “counting ball number” ) May be added.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the “counting ball number” increases within a predetermined period. Therefore, during the big hit gaming state (during the round), the number of possessed balls (the number of held balls) does not increase, and the “counting ball number” is The number increases to a number (for example, 1000 to 2000) according to the big hit type (period in which the big hit gaming state is controlled). Then, at the timing after the big hit gaming state is finished and the payout of the winning ball based on the winning in the big winning opening is finished, the “counting ball number” is added to the possessed ball number (the number of held balls). Become. In this case, the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) changes rapidly, but the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are appropriately displayed by the possessed ball special display control process of FIG. 37 described above. be able to.

  In addition, although the number of possessed balls is different from the special display, when the enclosed pachinko machine 2B is a gaming machine according to the present invention, the serial number ID is assigned to all enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in a wide area store. It is possible to construct a game system in which a predetermined management device (for example, a hall computer 6 installed in each store) manages and aggregates game information of all the enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in each store It is. Here, the “wide area” can be, for example, a predetermined area (for example, an area by prefecture) or the whole country. In this case, the hall computer 6 installed in one store displays information related to the game in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B installed in another store on the data display device 4 installed in the own store. It is possible to construct a simple game system.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the fifth gaming system 1C in this case. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same component as 1A of 3rd game systems and 4th game system 1B demonstrated by said embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted again.
The fifth gaming system 1C includes a plurality of enclosed pachinko machines 2B, a data display device 4 provided corresponding to each enclosed pachinko machine 2B, and a hall computer 6 for each of a plurality of stores. The enclosed pachinko machine 2B and the data display device 4 are connected to the hall computer 6 via a stand terminal. The hall computer 6 of each store is connected via a network N such as the Internet, and is configured to be able to send and receive information related to games in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B.

  In the present embodiment, the hall computer 6 includes a communication unit for communicating with the hall computer 6 in another store. The CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 transmits to the hall computer 6 of another store via the communication unit, the own store game total data obtained by totaling the game results of the respective enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in the own store. In addition, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 collects other store game total data obtained by totaling the game results of the enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in other stores from the hall computer 6 installed in other stores via the communication unit. Receive. The own store game total data and the other store game total data are stored in the hard disk 680 as a database, for example.

  The CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 collects the game total data for each model of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the own store and other shops at a predetermined timing (for example, every time a predetermined time elapses), The data is transmitted to the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the machine 2B. Then, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 gives information related to the game in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the own store and other stores to the second display unit 440 based on the game total data received from the hall computer 6. Control to display.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In the second display section 440, for "Pachinko XXX" which is the model of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the average number of hits of our store, which is the average number of big hits of our own store, and the average number of big hits of the A store which is another store, respectively It is displayed. Further, since the average number of jackpots of the store is larger than that of the store A, the message “Our store has more jackpots!” Is displayed. By performing such display, surrounding players can know the number of jackpots of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the other store, in addition to the number of jackpots of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the store, and at which store It is possible to grasp whether it is advantageous to play a game.

  Next, with respect to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to replace the pachinko machine 2 with a slot machine as a gaming machine. When the gaming machine is a slot machine, according to the number of medals possessed by the player, the possessed medal special display control process similar to the possessed ball special display control process described in the above embodiment is performed to obtain the number of possessed medals. The corresponding first predetermined image and second predetermined image may be controlled to be displayed / hidden.

  If a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4 as described in the third embodiment, the inter-unit counting unit 5 sends a possessed medal number signal indicating the number of medal possessed by the player to the data display device 4. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is configured to output the specified medal number of the player based on the possessed medal number signal output from the inter-counter counting unit 5, What is necessary is to perform non-display control.

  If a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the card unit 3 as described in the fourth embodiment, the player is based on the counting result of the number of medals possessed by the counting payout unit 380 provided in the card unit 3. It is only necessary to determine the number of possessed medals and perform display control and non-display control of a predetermined image.

  In this case, the first predetermined image may be a medal dollar box into which a medal acquired by the player is inserted, or a bulk of medals stacked in one box. In addition, the second predetermined image can be a special box for medals into which medals acquired by the player are inserted, or a bulk of medals stacked in another box.

  The first display threshold (first value) for displaying the first predetermined image and the first non-display threshold (second value) for non-displaying the first predetermined image are within a predetermined time range. The number of medals possessed can be determined based on the number. Specifically, when the number of medals to be paid back to the player by one payout operation is 50, for example, 75 pieces having a margin of 25 pieces for 50 pieces are set as the first display threshold value and the first display non-display state. The difference (first predetermined number) from the threshold is used. For example, the first display threshold is set to 200, and the first non-display threshold is set to 125.

  Further, the second display threshold value is larger than the first display threshold value, and the difference (second predetermined number) between the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value is larger than the first predetermined number. A display threshold value and a second non-display threshold value are determined. For example, the second predetermined number is 150, the second display threshold is 1000, and the second non-display threshold is 850.

  When the gaming machine is a slot machine, the display contents of the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 include the model name of the slot machine, the start count, the bonus occurrence count (RB occurrence count, BB occurrence count), Information such as the number of times a privilege is granted (the number of occurrences of ART, the number of occurrences of RT), a start history graph, etc. may be determined. Moreover, what is necessary is just to define information, such as vacant information, information during bonuses, information during privilege provision, as the display content of the 2nd display part 440. In addition, display contents related to specific effects (simultaneous effects) can be determined in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

  Further, the signal that can specify the number of possessed game media transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5 to the data display device 4 includes a possessed ball signal indicating the player's possessed ball and the number of possessed medals indicating the number of possessed medals of the player. It is not limited to signals. Instead of these signals, a signal indicating the number of increase / decrease in game media (pachinko balls or medals) (hereinafter referred to as “game medium increase / decrease number signal”) may be transmitted to the data display device 4. In this case, the data display device 4 determines the number of possessed game media by updating the number of possessed balls and the number of possessed medals of the player based on the game media increase / decrease signal transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5. What should I do?

  The timing for outputting a signal that can specify the number of possessed game media is the timing for each predetermined time interval, the timing when the count result of the visitor card unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, and the count of the visitor card unit 380 The count is determined when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the end, and an intermittent timing such as a timing for waiting for the determination may be used. The design of the timing at which the signal is output can be appropriately changed. .

  Also, a predetermined image (first predetermined image, second predetermined image) is displayed on the display unit (first display unit 430 and / or second display unit 440) of the data display device 4 or the display unit 340 of the card unit 3. Instead, a display unit may be configured on the front surface of each counter provided in the lower part of the pachinko machine 2 corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, and a predetermined image may be displayed on the display unit.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a display unit provided in each counter counter 7 in this case. Under the pachinko machine 2, each counter 7 is provided so that pachinko balls discharged from the lower plate 24 of the pachinko machine 2 can be counted. A display unit 740 is provided on the front face of each counter 7 and the control unit of each counter 7 performs a possessed ball special display control process (see FIG. 37) similar to the above embodiment, The display unit 730 is controlled to display the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image.

  In the above embodiment, the information display device according to the present invention has been described as the data display device 4. However, the information display device is not limited to this. Instead of the data display device 4, a conventional calling lamp device 9 can be used as an information display device.

  In the above embodiment, the touch panel 421 is provided on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4, and the player calls the store clerk or selects a menu by tapping the screen with a finger. However, instead of the touch panel 421, a call button or a menu selection button may be provided on the housing, and the player may call the store clerk or select a menu by pressing the call button or the menu selection button.

  In the above embodiment, the second display unit 440 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the first display unit 430. However, the second display unit 440 may be provided on only one of the left and right sides. . Further, the second display portion 440 may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A instead of being provided so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage. Also in this case, the second display unit 440 may be provided on both the left and right side surfaces, or the second display unit 440 may be provided only on one of the left and right side surfaces.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, the angle of the 2nd display part 440 is changed relatively with respect to the 1st display part 430 by rotating the door part 4B by the hinge part 4C. However, it is also possible to adopt a fixed configuration in which the angle of the second display unit 440 does not change relative to the first display unit 430. In this case, the base portion 4A and the sub base portion are arranged so that the member forming the second display portion 440 (hereinafter referred to as “sub base portion”) has a predetermined opening angle with respect to the base portion 4A. What is necessary is just to comprise integrally.

  Specifically, the opening angle in a state where the base portion 4A and the sub base portion overlap with each other is set to 0 °, and the sub base portion is opened like a door from this state (by rotating with one end of the base portion 4A as a reference). ), When the opening angle in a state in which the sub-base portion is perpendicular to the base portion 4A is defined as 90 °, the setting angle of the sub-base portion is, for example, set within an angle range of 60 ° to 90 ° It can be an angle. If the installation angle is included in this angle range, the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the game position of the player who plays with the gaming machine, but the surrounding players from the end of the game island can see the second display unit. 440 can be visually recognized.

  In addition to the above, the second display unit 440 may be disposed on the main body side surface of the data display device 4 (both left and right side surfaces or one of the left and right side surfaces). That is, instead of providing the sub base portion so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage, the sub base portion may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A.

  In the third embodiment, the possessed ball special display is described as being displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4. However, the possessed ball is displayed on the second display unit 440 instead of the first display unit 430. A special display may be displayed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the display table 681 stored in the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 6 in this case.
When this display table 681 is viewed, the possessed ball special display is not defined in the display content of the first display unit 430. Instead, the display content of the second display unit 440 includes (1) the possessed ball special display. Is stipulated.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of the second display unit display pattern table 683b stored in the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 6 in this case.
Looking at the second display portion display pattern table 683b, the full-screen possessed ball special display is defined as “pattern T” in the display mode of the second display portion 440.

  In this case, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 may create display setting data 691 based on the above table and transmit the data to the data display device 4 to perform display settings of the data display device 4.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the possessed sphere special display displayed on the second display unit 440 in this case. FIG. 62 shows an example of a display screen of the possessed ball special display when a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image. Note that the display method of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image is the same as the display method described in the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Note that the possessed ball special display is not displayed on either one of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, but both the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 are displayed. It is good also as displaying a possessed ball special display on the display part.

  In addition, the second display unit 440 is not necessarily a display that displays information using characters or numbers, and may be an LED lamp that notifies the player of information by light emission. Specifically, for example, a sub-base portion in which a circular or polygonal LED (triangle, quadrangle, hexagon, etc.) LED lamp is formed is provided on the side surface of the data display device 4 (both left and right sides or one of the left and right sides). Thus, a side lamp can be configured. Moreover, it is good also as providing an LED lamp in the form which protrudes from the base | substrate part 4A to the channel | path side using a bridge | bridging. In this case, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 causes the LED lamp to emit information such as during the big hit of the pachinko machine 2, during the probability change, during the latent probability change, in the short time, and in the vacant platform, with different emission colors and emission patterns. It may be controlled to.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of an LED light emission table which is a table relating to the setting of light emission of the LED lamp in this case. This LED light emission table can be stored in advance in a memory (storage device) of the hall computer 6. Then, the CPU 610 of the hall computer 6 performs settings related to light emission of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 based on the LED light emission table.

  In the LED light emission table, a type, a number, and a light emission setting of the LED lamp are stored in association with each other. In the light emission setting of the LED lamp, notification contents, a light emission color, and a light emission pattern are determined. The notification contents are contents to be notified to the player by the emission color and the emission pattern.

  For example, in “empty base information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is an empty base, “blue” is set as the emission color and “lighting” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is an empty board, the LED lamp is controlled to be lit in blue.

  In the “hit information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in a big hit, “red” is set as the emission color, and “flashing at time intervals of α seconds” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is an empty board, the LED lamp is controlled to blink in red.

  In the “latency probability change information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latency probability, “green” is defined as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of β seconds” is defined as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latent probability, the LED lamp is controlled to be lit in green.

  In the “latency probability change information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latency probability, “yellow” is set as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of γ seconds” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is running short, the LED lamp is controlled to be turned on in yellow.

  The correspondence relationship between the notification content related to the light emission setting of the LED lamp, the light emission color, and the light emission pattern is merely an example, and the design can be changed as appropriate. The time interval of blinking of the LED lamp (for example, the above-described α second, β second, and γ second) can be set as appropriate. Further, instead of causing the LED lamp to emit light with a fixed emission color, information may be transmitted to surrounding players by illumination combining various emission colors.

  In the above embodiment, the control device according to the present invention has been described as the hall computer 6, but the control device is not limited to the hall computer 6. A base terminal installed on each amusement island may be used as the control device, or a relay computer that relays the base terminal and the hall computer 6 may be installed, and this relay computer may be used as the control device. Moreover, it is good also considering the possession management computer 8 demonstrated in 4th Embodiment as the control apparatus which concerns on this invention.

  The member management computer 8 does not manage the member data, but a member management computer for managing the member card is installed in the store separately from the hall computer 6 and the member management computer 8, and this member management is performed. A computer may be the control device according to the present invention.

  Further, a computer having two or three functions among the hall computer 6, the possession management computer 8, and the member management computer may be used as the control device according to the present invention. That is, (1) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8, (2) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the member management computer, and (3) the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer. (4) Any one of the computers having the functions of the hall computer 6, the possession management computer 8 and the member management computer may be used as the control device according to the present invention.

  In the above embodiment, the plastic lid P is exemplified as the cover that covers the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, but the cover is not limited thereto. If the cover is a lid, it is not limited to the plastic lid P, and may be a glass lid or a wooden lid. Moreover, it is good also considering the housing surrounding the 2nd display part 440 as a cover other than a cover as a cover which concerns on this invention. The housing can be, for example, a colored plastic, vinyl, or wooden housing.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a housing in this case.
A housing 445 is detachably configured to surround the entire door portion 4B on which the second display portion 440 is formed. Specifically, a housing 445 formed in a U-shape in front view so as to surround a surface of the door portion 4B other than the bonding surface of the hinge portion 4C is configured to be attachable to the door portion 4B. By attaching such a housing 445 to the door portion 4B, it is possible to create a state in which the second display portion 440 cannot be further visually recognized by a player playing a game machine.

  Note that the housing 445 may have a bottomed structure including a bottom part surrounding the inner surface of the door part 4B, or may have a bottomless structure without a bottom part. When the bottomed structure is adopted, the inner surface of the door portion 4B is surrounded by the housing 445, so that even the inner surface of the door portion 4B cannot be seen by the player, as if the player It is possible to create a state as if they were isolated.

  In addition, the above-described cover is not necessarily a cover that covers the entire second display unit 440, and may be a cover that covers a part of the second display unit 440. For example, a cover that covers only the center of the second display unit 440 may be used, or a cover that covers the right half, the left half, the upper half, and the lower half of the second display unit 440. Moreover, it is good also as a cover body which covers the circumference | surroundings of the 2nd display part 440. FIG.

  In addition, information corresponding to the type of the pachinko machine 2 is displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4, and information not depending on the type of the pachinko machine 2 is displayed on the second display unit 440. Also good. Information that does not depend on the type of the pachinko machine 2 includes information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine 2, such as during a big hit, during a probable change, in a vacant stand, the number of revolutions, the number of winnings, and the like. The first display unit 430 is controlled so as to display information depending on the type of the pachinko machine 2 such as latent probability variation information, time reduction information, suddenness information, and small hit information, and the second display unit 440 has a big hit. Control may be performed so as to display information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine, such as probability change, vacant stand, number of revolutions, number of winnings, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the data display device 4 receives the simultaneous effect display instruction signal from the hall computer 6, the simultaneous effect display is described. However, the simultaneous effect display may be performed based on the time measured by the clock unit 455 included in the data display device 4. In this case, the RTC 235 that is the clock unit included in the pachinko machine 2 and the clock unit 455 may be synchronized so that the simultaneous effect display is performed at the same timing as the pachinko machine 2 performs the simultaneous effect.

  In the big hit running effect, the hall computer 6 explained that the big hit running effect is performed by transmitting a display instruction signal for the big hit running effect to each data display device 4 with a delay of a predetermined delay time. However, the configuration for realizing the big hit running effect is not limited to this.

  For example, the data display devices 4 may be connected to each other using a predetermined communication cable, and a big hit running effect execution signal may be transmitted to each other using this communication cable. In this case, when the data display device 4 receives the big hit running effect execution signal from the adjacent data display device 4, the big hit running video is displayed by shifting the time by a predetermined time difference, and is displayed on the next data display device 4. A big hit running effect execution signal may be transmitted. That is, the big hit running effect can be realized by sequentially transmitting the big hit running effect execution signal according to the identification number of the data display device 4 in ascending order or descending order.

[7. Modified example]
Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the gaming machine is the pachinko machine 110 or the pachinko machine 2 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine. The number and the number of medals will be converted to other loan rates. If pachinko machines and slot machines coexist as gaming machines, the number of balls (the number of balls and the number of possessions) is converted into the number of medals (the number of medals and the number of medals), and conversely The number may be converted into the number of balls. The gaming machine may be a sealed pachinko machine. In this case, the score of one loan rate is converted to another loan rate.

  In the above embodiment, the management device for managing the ownership value may be a member management device or a possession management computer, and the management device is provided in the game hall and manages only the store. Alternatively, it may be provided outside the amusement hall and manage a plurality of stores.

  In the above embodiment, the conversion can be executed only when communication with the member management device 162 or the ball management computer 8 that manages the number of balls is possible (online), and cannot be performed when communication is not possible (offline). Is preferable.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the gaming device that performs the conversion is the ball lending unit 120 or the card unit 3 has been described. However, the gaming device may be, for example, a POS terminal that performs prize exchange processing, and this POS terminal Then, the card may be received, the number of balls specified from the recorded information of the card may be converted into one rate (for example, the lowest rate), the total value may be displayed, and the prize exchange process may be performed. At that time, a prize that can be exchanged with the converted number of balls may be displayed.

  The gaming device that performs the conversion may be a portable terminal possessed by a salesperson who performs a wagon service in the game hall. The portable terminal accepts the card and determines the number of balls specified from the recorded information of the card. It is possible to convert the rate to a rate that can be purchased.

  In the fourth embodiment, an example in which both the member card and the visitor card can be converted has been described. However, the member card may be converted, but the visitor card may not be converted. .

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which conversion is possible in any of the ball lending units 120 has been described. However, whether or not conversion is possible may be set for each of the ball lending units 120. Alternatively, batch setting from the member management apparatus 162 may be performed.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, the combination processing and conversion shown in H7 of FIG. 42 are performed in combination (that is, one player's card and another player's card are accepted, and the combination processing and conversion are performed. In addition, the ball splitting process and conversion shown in H15 are performed together (that is, one player's card and another player's card are accepted, Conversion).

  In the first and second embodiments described above, as shown in the “Example” of FIG. 73, the possession value management means for converting stored balls is the ball lending unit 120 (the stored ball table of FIG. 5), and the converting means is the ball lending. Unit 120 (CPU of control unit 122), totaling means and output means (conversion history totaling means and conversion history output means, post-conversion gaming machine totaling means and post-conversion gaming machine output means, conversion reception gaming machine totaling means and conversion reception gaming Although the example in which the machine output means) is provided in the member management device 162 (conversion history DB and CPU in FIG. 12B) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the possessed value management means, conversion means, aggregation means, output means May be provided as shown in “Modifications 1 to 17”.

  Here, when the member management device 162 or the hall computer 160 is provided with ownership value management means, the storage DB stored in the member management device 162 functions as the possession value management means, and the hall computer 160 stores the storage ball DB. It memorizes and functions as the ownership value management means. Further, when the member management apparatus 162 or the hall computer 160 is provided with conversion means, those CPUs function as the conversion means. Further, when the hall computer 160 is provided with a counting means and an output means, the hall computer 160 stores the conversion history DB and functions as a counting means together with the CPU, and the display or printer of the hall computer 160 is an output means. Function as.

  In the above fourth embodiment, as shown in the “Example” of FIG. 74, the possession value management means for converting the possession is the card unit 3 (the possession table similar to FIG. 5), and the conversion means is the card. Unit 3 (CPU 310 of control unit 305), totaling means and output means (conversion history totaling means and conversion history output means, post-conversion gaming machine totaling means and post-conversion gaming machine output means, conversion reception gaming machine totaling means and conversion reception gaming Although the example in which the machine output means) is provided in the possession management computer 8 (the same conversion history DB and CPU as in FIG. 12B) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the possessed value management means, conversion means, and aggregation means , The output means may be provided as shown in “Modifications 1 to 17”.

  When the possession management computer 8 or hall computer 6 is provided with possession value management means, the membership card management data and visitor card management data of FIG. 52 stored in the possession management computer 8 are used as the possession value management means. The hall computer 160 stores the member card management data and visitor card management data and functions as the possession value management means. Further, in the case where conversion means is provided in the holding ball management computer 8 or the hall computer 6, those CPUs function as the conversion means. When the hall computer 6 is provided with tabulation means and output means, the hall computer 6 stores the conversion history DB and functions as the tabulation means together with the CPU, and the display or printer of the hall computer 6 outputs the output means. Function as.

  Although not shown in the figure, the output of the total vote is not limited to that performed by the member management device 162, the hall computer 160, the possession management computer 8, and the hall computer 6, but a gaming device (a ball rental unit 120 or a card unit). 3) may be performed on the display provided in this case. In this case, the CPU of the member management device 162, the hall computer 160, the possession management computer 8, and the hall computer 6 generates a total vote with the gaming device. It functions as output means for performing processing for output (display). This is convenient because the store clerk at the game hall can check the total vote with the game device. In this case, it is preferable that the total vote is output on the condition that the store clerk is authenticated (for example, input of a password or operation of a remote controller possessed by the store clerk). It is also possible for the player to check the total vote with the gaming device.

  Although not shown in the figure, the conversion history is not limited to the totalization performed by the CPU of the member management device 162, the hall computer 160, the possession management computer 8, and the hall computer 6, but a gaming device (the ball rental unit 120 or the ball rental unit 120). It may be performed by the CPU of the card unit 3). In this case, the CPU of the gaming device functions as a conversion history counting means. Specifically, the CPU of each gaming device stores the conversion history executed by the gaming device as in the conversion history DB shown in FIG. Here, the “converted unit ID” stores the unit ID of the gaming apparatus. In addition, the “unit ID that played a game after conversion” stores the unit ID of the gaming device when the gaming device replay process is performed on the gaming device, and replays the saved ball on another gaming device. When the process is performed, the unit ID of the other gaming device is stored by receiving the replayed ball replay signal from the other gaming device.

  Then, the conversion history for the member ID being accepted is collected from each gaming device (the gaming device and other gaming devices) and aggregated, whereby the membership ID for each card shown in FIG. Can create summary forms. Further, based on the stored conversion history, a unit-by-unit total vote shown in FIG. 14 (b) can be created for the gaming device, and by collecting the conversion history from other gaming devices, the other game For each device, a unit-by-unit tabulation shown in FIG. 14B can be created. Further, by collecting and totaling conversion histories from each gaming device, it is possible to create a rate-by-rate tabulation shown in FIG. Further, by collecting and totalizing conversion histories from each gaming device, it is also possible to create each tabulation shown in FIGS.

  As described above, it is convenient for the game ticket to be confirmed by the game shop clerk if it is possible to output the total vote created by the gaming device in this manner using the gaming device. It is.

  Note that the conversion history DB is not stored in the gaming device, but may be stored in the IC chip of the card (member card, visitor card). The conversion history DB is stored in the conversion history stored in the IC chip of the card. Based on this, the card-by-card tabulations shown in FIG. 14A may be tabulated and output by the gaming device.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the member management device 162 that manages the stored balls and the managed ball management computer 8 that manages the stored balls are separate has been described. Good.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, conversion of a stored ball (so-called past stored ball) that is managed in association with the member ID of the member card 103 and can be used after the next day after saving has been described. In the form, it may be managed in association with the card ID (or member ID) of the member card 103 and can also convert the possessed ball that can be used only on the acquired day (so-called same day storage ball).

  In the fourth embodiment, the conversion of the possessed ball (so-called same day storage ball) managed in association with the card ID of the visitor card or the membership card and usable only on the acquired day has been described. In the form, it may be possible to convert the stored balls (so-called past stored balls) that are managed in association with the member ID of the member card and can be used after the next day after saving (so-called past stored balls).

  In the fourth embodiment described above, an example has been described in which the conversion history is totaled in the conversion history DB illustrated in FIG. 12B, and then the tabulation tables illustrated in FIGS. 14 to 16 are created. Instead of providing the conversion history DB, a totaling vote may be directly created (that is, the conversion history posted on the counting vote is totaled).

[8. Other inventions]
Finally, other inventions included in the present application will be described.

[8-1. First invention]
Conventionally, as shown in Prior Art Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005655), it is provided corresponding to a gaming machine, is provided with each counter, and the number of coins counted by each counter A gaming device that pays out gaming media within the range, and the number of possessed balls at the same rate as the gaming media lending rate (for example, 4 yen) in the gaming device meets a predetermined number of paidouts (for example, 125 balls). When there is not, what performs the process (what is called entry) which changes the number of balls of other rates (for example, 1 yen) into the number of balls of the loan rate concerned is known.

  However, the gaming device of the above-mentioned prior art document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to recognize how much a game is possible based on the number of balls with the loan rate after the conversion.

  The first invention is made under such a background, and the object is to change the first property value corresponding to one loan rate to the second property value corresponding to another loan rate. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming apparatus that facilitates recognizing how much gaming is possible based on the possession value of other loan rates after conversion.

First, 1 of the first invention is
Owned value (the number of stored balls, which can be used for games in the gaming machine (the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 110 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) and is owned by the player Possession value storage means (a storage table of the control unit 122) for storing the possessed ball count, the possession medal count) for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the possession value is lent.
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion process of S118),
A gaming apparatus (first embodiment, ball lending unit 120 according to the second embodiment, card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
The first display unit number in which the first property value before conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls), and the second property value after conversion is converted in the predetermined display unit. It is a gaming apparatus characterized by further comprising unit number display means for displaying the second display unit number (the CPU and display 124 of the control unit 122 that performs the processing of S102 and S109 or S115).
According to this, the first display unit number in which the first property value before conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit, and the second value in which the second property value after conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit. Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of other loan rates after conversion.

Moreover, 2 of 1st invention is
A gaming device according to 1 of the first invention,
The gaming device further includes specific effect executing means (a CPU and a display 124 of the control unit 122 that performs display during conversion in S118) that executes a specific effect when the conversion means performs conversion.
This makes it easy to understand that the ownership value is being converted.

Moreover, 3 of 1st invention is
A gaming device described in 1 or 2 of the first invention (card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, medals),
The gaming device is configured to display a predetermined image (dollar box, thousand box) when the number of game media (number of possessed balls, number of possessed medals) of a player who plays with the gaming machine reaches a first value (first display threshold). Display control for displaying on the display means (display unit 340), and when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the number of possessed game media has the first value. Even if it falls below the first value, it is a predetermined number of times (difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: for example, 125 pachinko balls are paid out once, medal is paid out once The predetermined image is not hidden when the value reaches a small second value (first non-display threshold), or the predetermined image is less than the second value. Display control means (display control board 3) capable of executing non-display control for making the display non-display 9) further comprising a a gaming apparatus according to claim.
According to this, by displaying a predetermined image on the display means based on the number of possessed game media, it is possible to realize an intuitive and easy-to-understand display indicating the number of game media possessed by the player and the game state. Further, the second value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent frequent switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image due to increase / decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

Also, 4 of the first invention is
A gaming device according to any one of 1 to 3 of the first invention,
The gaming device is characterized in that the display mode of the first display unit number is different from the display mode of the second display unit number.
According to this, it can be easily recognized whether it is the 1st property value before conversion, or the 2nd property value after conversion.

Also, 5 of the first invention is
A gaming apparatus (card unit 3 according to a fourth embodiment) described in any one of 1 to 4 of the first invention,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, medals),
The gaming device is:
Possessed game medium number counting means (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of possessed game media of a player who plays with the gaming machine;
When the number of possessed game media (the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) counted by the possessed game media number counting means reaches a first value (first display threshold value), a predetermined image (dollar box, thousand box, Display control for causing the display means (display unit 340) to display stepwise display) and even if the number of possessed game media falls below the first value when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, Predetermined number of times from the first value (difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: for example, 125 pachinko balls are paid out once, 50 medals are paid out once Alternatively, if the predetermined second value (first non-display threshold) is reached, the predetermined image is not hidden, and if the predetermined value is lower than the second value, the predetermined image is not displayed. Display control means (display control board 329) capable of executing non-display control for If a gaming device, characterized in that it further comprises a.
According to this, the number of game media possessed by a player who plays a game machine is counted by the possessed game media number counting means, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display means based on the counted number of possessed game media. Intuitive and easy-to-understand display indicating the number of game media possessed and the game state can be realized. Further, the second value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent frequent switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image due to increase / decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

Also, 6 of the first invention is
The gaming device according to 3 or 5 of the first invention,
When the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the display control means determines that the number of possessed game media has a predetermined trigger (for example, a single payout of a pachinko ball or medal, an enclosed pachinko machine 2B or The number by which the number of possessed game media is reduced to the number of game media possessed by one lending operation of game media in an enclosed slot machine (for example, 125 pachinko balls are paid out once, medal is paid out once) The predetermined number set based on the number of 50 sheets (the number of points deducted per time) (for example, 200 pachinko balls having 200 margins and 50 medals having 75 margins) In the gaming device, the non-display control is executed when the number of points deducted per time is less than the second value smaller than the first value. is there.
According to this, the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value can be optimized based on the number that the number of possessed game media decreases at a predetermined opportunity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

Also, 7 of the first invention is
The gaming device according to 5 of the first invention,
The game media is paid back to the player within the range of the number of possessed game media (game media is refunded by control of the card unit 3, game media is refunded by a nozzle, game in an enclosed pachinko machine 2B or an enclosed slot machine) Further including a refund control means (visitor card unit 380) for performing control for including a deduction based on a medium lending operation.
The possessed game medium number counting means has an accepted game medium number counting means (counter sensor of the visitor card unit 380) capable of counting the number of received game media, and the counting result of the received game medium number counting means and the refund The gaming device is characterized in that the number of possessed game media is updated based on the number of payouts by the control means.
According to this, by updating the number of possessed game media based on the count result of the accepted game media and the number of paid-out game media, it is possible to accurately count the number of possessed game media, and display / display a predetermined image. Non-display control can be performed accurately.

Also, 8 of the first invention is
A gaming device according to any one of 3 or 5 to 7 of the first invention,
The display control means controls to update the display of the predetermined image stepwise according to the number of possessed game media (increase the number of dollar boxes, increase the ball bulk),
The display stage of the predetermined image displayed on the display means can be specified (update of the display counter value according to the display stage, a predetermined reference number of game media (for example, a first non-multiple value of the first display threshold value). Storage flag (RAM 330) for storing) setting display flag based on (number of display thresholds added);
And determining means (CPU 310) for determining the display stage of the predetermined image to be displayed on the display control means based on the display stage stored in the storage means and the number of possessed game media. This is a gaming device.
According to this, by storing the display stage of the predetermined image displayed on the display means in an identifiable manner, particularly when the predetermined number of game media is a number between the first value and the second value. It is possible to appropriately determine whether the predetermined image should be displayed or not displayed.

Also, 9 of the first invention is
A gaming device according to any one of 3 or 5 to 8 of the first invention,
The display control means, when the number of possessed game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (step display of dollar box, thousand box, and ball bulk). Can be displayed, and a second display control for displaying a second predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new stepped display of a ball volume) different from the predetermined image on the display means can be executed. There is a gaming apparatus characterized by being.
According to this, since the second predetermined image can be newly displayed while the predetermined image is not displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of possessed game media, the display width can be further expanded.

Also, 10 of the first invention is
A gaming device according to any one of 3 or 5 to 9 of the first invention,
The display control means, when the number of possessed game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (dollar box, thousands of boxes, ball bulk) on the display means. The second display for displaying on the display means a second predetermined image (special box, box, new ball display), which is different from the predetermined image. A gaming device characterized by being capable of executing control.
According to this, since the predetermined image can be continuously displayed and the second predetermined image can be newly displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of possessed game media, the display width can be further widened.

Also, 11 of the first invention is
A gaming device according to 9 or 10 of the first invention,
When the second predetermined image is being displayed on the display means, the display control means has a second predetermined number of possessed game media numbers greater than the third value (a second display threshold and a second non-display). Difference from the threshold: For example, 125 balls that are paid out once for pachinko balls, 200 balls that give a certain margin to this, 50 balls that are paid out once for a medal, and a certain margin for this If the second predetermined image is not hidden if it has reached a small fourth value (second non-display threshold value), or 75 sheets that have been held, or if it falls below the fourth value, A gaming apparatus characterized by being capable of executing a second non-display control for making the second predetermined image non-displayable.
According to this, a second predetermined image can be newly displayed as the number of possessed game media increases. The fourth value for hiding the second predetermined image is smaller by a second predetermined number than the third value for displaying the second predetermined image. By providing the difference between the third value and the fourth value for the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the second predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold. be able to.

Also, 12 of the first invention is
A gaming device according to 11 of the first invention,
When the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the display control means is configured such that the number of possessed game media is equal to the predetermined number of the first value (the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value). Difference: for example, 200 pachinko balls, 75 medals, or a predetermined first setting value) When the value is smaller than the second value, the non-display control is executed, and the display means When the predetermined image is displayed, the number of possessed game media is set to a value equal to the second predetermined number (the second display threshold value and the first value) set as a value larger than the difference between the first value and the second value. 2 Difference from non-display threshold: for example, 400 pachinko balls, 150 medals, or a predetermined second set value) when the second value is smaller than the second value, the second A gaming apparatus characterized by executing non-display control.
According to this, the second predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the third value and the fourth value is larger than the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value. For this reason, the second predetermined image can be made less likely to be hidden compared to the predetermined image.

[8-2. Second invention]
Conventionally, as shown in Prior Art Document 2 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005655), it is provided corresponding to a gaming machine, and includes each counter, and the number of balls counted by each counter A gaming device that pays out gaming media within the range, and the number of possessed balls at the same rate as the gaming media lending rate (for example, 4 yen) in the gaming device meets a predetermined number of paidouts (for example, 125 balls). When there is not, what performs the process (what is called entry) which changes the number of balls of other rates (for example, 1 yen) into the number of balls of the loan rate concerned is known.

  However, in the gaming apparatus of the above-mentioned prior art document 2, there is a risk that the amount of balls stored will increase too much with the conversion.

  The second invention has been made under such a background, and its purpose is to change the first property value corresponding to one loan rate to the second property value corresponding to another loan rate. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system and a management device that, when converted, do not cause an excessive increase in the amount of possessed value associated with the conversion.

First, 1 of the second invention is
Can be used for gaming on gaming machines (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and possessed value owned by the player (number of balls, possession of balls, possession The number of medals) is managed for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent (for example, the storage table of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120, the member management device 162 Storage card DB, membership card management data and visitor card management data of the money management computer 8),
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118, the CPU of the member management device 162, the CPU of the possession management computer 8),
A gaming system (a gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment, a fourth gaming system 1B according to the fourth embodiment),
As the conversion condition, the conversion means has a specific value that is the sum of the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted and the second ownership value managed by the management means. (When the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted is Y, and the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is Z, 4Y + Z ≦ specific value formula 2) Or when the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is x, the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted among these x is y, and the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is z, (y / 4) + z ≦ The game system is characterized in that the conversion is executed when the specific value formula 2 ′ is satisfied.
According to this, it can prevent that the memory | storage amount of possession value increases too much with conversion.

Moreover, 2 of 2nd invention is
Can be used for gaming on gaming machines (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and possessed value owned by the player (number of balls, possession of balls, possession The number of medals) is managed for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent (for example, the storage table of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120, the member management device 162 Storage card DB, membership card management data and visitor card management data of the money management computer 8),
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (the CPU of the control unit 122 of the ball lending unit 120 that performs the conversion process of S118, the CPU of the member management device 162, the CPU of the possession management computer 8),
A gaming system (a gaming system 1 according to the first embodiment, a fourth gaming system 1B according to the fourth embodiment),
The conversion means converts, as the conversion condition, the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted and the first ownership value managed by the management means. If the total value of the remaining first ownership value of the second and the second ownership value managed by the management means does not exceed a specific value (the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, When Y is the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted and Z is the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion, when (XY) + 4Y + Z ≦ specific value expression 1 is satisfied, or 1-yen stored ball number before conversion is x , Where x is the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted and y is the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is z, (xy) + (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 in this example) The game system is characterized in that the conversion is executed when the expression (1 ′) is satisfied).
According to this, it can prevent that the memory | storage amount of possession value increases too much with conversion.

Moreover, 3 of 2nd invention is
A gaming system according to 1 or 2 of the second invention,
The conversion means, as the conversion condition, when the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted does not exceed the specific value (the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, When Y is the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted, Y satisfies 4Y ≦ specific value expression 0. Alternatively, x is the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion, and y is the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted. In this case, the conversion is executed when y / 4 ≦ specific value expression 0 ′ is satisfied).
According to this, when the second property value when the first property value is converted exceeds the specific value, the other conversion condition is not satisfied, so whether or not the other conversion condition is satisfied. There is no need to determine whether or not.

Also, 4 of the second invention is
The gaming system according to any one of 1 to 3 of the second invention,
Accepting means (designation button displayed on the display 124) for accepting designation of the first property value to be converted by the converting means;
Informing means for informing the first property value that satisfies the conversion condition (display 124 that displays the allowable number of balls in the conversion disabled display 1 so that the number of stored balls after conversion is within the set upper limit range); And a game system characterized by further comprising:
According to this, since conversion can be performed as much as possible, the convenience of the player can be improved.

Also, 5 of the second invention is
The gaming system according to any one of 1 to 4 of the second invention,
A recording medium provided corresponding to the gaming machine and capable of specifying the ownership value managed by the management means is received, and the ownership value specified from the recording medium (member card 103, possession card) is given to the game. A game device (ball lending unit 120 according to the first embodiment, card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) that performs the processing to be used (recycled ball replay processing, payout control processing of the number of possessed balls) is further provided,
The management means is provided in a management device capable of communicating with the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Based on acceptance of the recording medium (YES in S01), ownership value specifying means (CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the matching process in S100) that specifies the ownership value from the recording medium;
It further comprises conversion condition determination means (CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the processing of S105) for determining whether or not the conversion condition is satisfied based on the ownership value specified by the ownership value specifying means. This is a gaming system.
According to this, since it is determined whether or not the conversion condition is satisfied in the gaming apparatus, the processing burden on the management apparatus can be reduced.

Also, 6 of the second invention is
Can be used for gaming on gaming machines (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and possessed value owned by the player (number of balls, possession of balls, possession The number of medals) is managed for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent (for example, the storage DB of the member management device 162 and the membership card management of the possession management computer 8). Data and visitor card management data), and
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (CPU of the member management device 162, CPU of the possession management computer 8),
A management device (member management device 162, possession management computer 8) comprising:
The conversion means has, as the conversion condition, the total value of the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted and the second ownership value managed by the management means has a specific value. If it does not exceed (when the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted is Y, and the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is Z, 4 Y + Z ≦ specific value formula 2 Or if the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is x, the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted is x, and the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is z, then (y / 4) + z ≤ specified When the value formula 2 ′ is satisfied, the conversion is performed.
According to this, it can prevent that the memory | storage amount of possession value increases too much with conversion.

Also, 7 of the second invention is
Can be used for gaming on gaming machines (pachinko machine 110 according to the first embodiment, pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, slot machine) and possessed value owned by the player (number of balls, possession of balls, possession The number of medals) is managed for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the ownership value is lent (for example, the storage DB of the member management device 162 and the membership card management of the possession management computer 8). Data and visitor card management data), and
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate managed by the ownership value management means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion means (CPU of the member management device 162, CPU of the possession management computer 8),
A management device (member management device 162, possession management computer 8) comprising:
The conversion means converts, as the conversion condition, the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted and the first ownership value managed by the management means. If the total value of the remaining first ownership value of the second and the second ownership value managed by the management means does not exceed a specific value (the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, When Y is the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted and Z is the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion, when (XY) + 4Y + Z ≦ specific value expression 1 is satisfied, or the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion is x , Where x is the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted and y is the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is z, (xy) + (y / 4) + z ≦ specific value (250,000 in this example) The above-mentioned conversion is executed when the equation 1 ′ of the ball is satisfied).
According to this, it can prevent that the memory | storage amount of possession value increases too much with conversion.

Also, 8 of the second invention is
The management apparatus according to 6 or 7 of the second invention,
The conversion means, as the conversion condition, when the second ownership value when the first ownership value is converted does not exceed the specific value (the number of 4-yen stored balls before conversion is X, When Y is the number of 4-yen stored balls to be converted, Y satisfies 4Y ≦ specific value expression 0. Alternatively, x is the number of 1-yen stored balls before conversion, and y is the number of 1-yen stored balls to be converted. In this case, the conversion is performed when y / 4 ≦ specific value expression 0 ′ is satisfied).
According to this, it can prevent that the memory | storage amount of possession value increases too much with conversion.

Furthermore, 9 of the second invention is
The management apparatus according to any one of 6 to 8 of the second invention,
A management apparatus comprising history storage means for storing a history of conversion executed by the conversion means.
According to this, since the conversion history can be confirmed, fraud etc. can be prevented.

[8-3. Third invention]

  Conventionally, as shown in Prior Art Document 3 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005655), it is provided in correspondence with a gaming machine, includes each counter, and the number of balls counted by each counter A gaming device that pays out gaming media within the range, and the number of possessed balls at the same rate as the gaming media lending rate (for example, 4 yen) in the gaming device meets a predetermined number of paidouts (for example, 125 balls). When there is not, what performs the process (what is called entry) which changes the number of balls of other rates (for example, 1 yen) into the number of balls of the loan rate concerned is known.

  However, in the gaming device of the above-mentioned prior art document 3, if other processing is performed when the conversion is performed, the possession value such as the number of balls is changed and the player is confused. There was a problem that occurred.

  The third invention is made under such a background, and its purpose is to change the first property value corresponding to one loan rate to the second property value corresponding to another loan rate. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming apparatus capable of preventing a situation in which the value of ownership changes and confuses a player when converting.

First, 1 of the third invention is
Owned value (the number of stored balls, which can be used for games in the gaming machine (the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 110 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) and is owned by the player Possession value storage means (a storage table of the control unit 122) for storing the possessed ball count, the possession medal count) for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the possession value is lent.
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion processing means (a CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion processing of S118) for performing conversion processing for
A gaming apparatus (first embodiment, ball lending unit 120 according to the second embodiment, card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
When the conversion process is performed, the apparatus further includes a first restriction unit (CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the process of S101) that restricts the execution of the loan at the one loan rate and the other loan rate. This is a gaming device.
According to this, since the execution of lending is restricted when the conversion process is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possessed value changes and the player is confused.

Moreover, 2 of 3rd invention is
A gaming device according to 1 of the third invention,
The conversion processing means is a gaming apparatus characterized by restricting execution of the conversion process while the lending process (the ball lending process of S300) is being performed.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ownership value changes due to execution of the conversion process while the lending process is performed, and the player is confused.

Moreover, 3 of 3rd invention is
Usable value (number of stored balls, number of possessed balls, number of possessed medals) that can be used for games on a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine according to the fourth embodiment) and possessed by the player is lent. Ownership value storage means (a storage table of the control unit 122) for storing each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion processing means (a CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion processing of S118) for performing conversion processing for
A gaming device (card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment) comprising:
Counting means (counting payout unit 380) for counting the possessed value (the number of possessed balls) acquired by the player by playing with the gaming machine;
When the conversion process is performed, the gaming apparatus further includes a second restriction unit (a CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the process of S101) that restricts execution of the counting by the counting unit. .
According to this, since the execution of counting is limited when the conversion process is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possessed value is changed and the player is confused.

Also, 4 of the third invention is
A gaming apparatus according to 3 of the third invention,
The conversion processing means limits the execution of the conversion processing while the counting is being performed.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possession value is changed by executing the conversion process while counting is performed, and the player is confused.

Also, 5 of the third invention is
Owned value (the number of stored balls, which can be used for games in the gaming machine (the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 110 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 according to the fourth embodiment, the slot machine) and is owned by the player Possession value storage means (a storage table of the control unit 122) for storing the possessed ball count, the possession medal count) for each loan rate (for example, 4 yen and 1 yen) when the possession value is lent.
The first ownership value (for example, the number of 4-yen savings) corresponding to one loan rate stored in the ownership value storage means is converted into the second ownership value (for example, the number of 1-yen savings) corresponding to another lending rate. Conversion processing means (a CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the conversion processing of S118) for performing conversion processing for
A gaming apparatus (first embodiment, ball lending unit 120 according to the second embodiment, card unit 3 according to the fourth embodiment),
When the conversion process is performed, the use process (S500 replay process of S500, payout process of the number of possessed balls of H29, launch of a pachinko ball in an enclosed pachinko machine) is executed to cause the game to use the possessed value. The game apparatus is further characterized by further including third restriction means (CPU of the control unit 122 that performs the process of S101) for restricting the above.
According to this, since the execution of the use process is restricted when the conversion process is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the possessed value changes and the player is confused.

Also, 6 of the third invention is
A gaming device according to 5 of the third invention,
The conversion processing means restricts the execution of the conversion process while the payout (the replay process of the stored ball in S500, the payout process of the number of possessed balls of H29, and the launch of the pachinko balls in the enclosed pachinko machine) is performed. This is a gaming apparatus characterized by the above.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the conversion process is executed while the use process is being performed, thereby changing the possession value and confusing the player.

Also, 7 of the third invention is
A gaming apparatus according to any one of 1 to 6 of the third invention,
The first display unit number in which the first property value before conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit (2000 balls), and the second property value after conversion is converted in the predetermined display unit. It is a gaming apparatus characterized by further comprising unit number display means for displaying the second display unit number (the CPU and display 124 of the control unit 122 that performs the processing of S102 and S109 or S115).
According to this, the first display unit number in which the first property value before conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit, and the second value in which the second property value after conversion is converted in a predetermined display unit. Since the number of display units is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize how much the game is possible based on the possession value of other loan rates after conversion.

Also, 8 of the third invention is
A gaming apparatus (card unit 3 according to a fourth embodiment) described in any one of 1 to 7 of the third invention,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, medals),
The gaming device is configured to display a predetermined image (dollar box, thousand box) when the number of game media (number of possessed balls, number of possessed medals) of a player who plays with the gaming machine reaches a first value (first display threshold). Display control for displaying on the display means (display unit 340), and when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the number of possessed game media has the first value. Even if it falls below the first value, it is a predetermined number of times (difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: for example, 125 pachinko balls are paid out once, medal is paid out once The predetermined image is not hidden when the value reaches a small second value (first non-display threshold), or the predetermined image is less than the second value. Display control means (display control board 3) capable of executing non-display control for making the display non-display 9) further comprising a a gaming apparatus according to claim.
According to this, by displaying a predetermined image on the display means based on the number of possessed game media, it is possible to realize an intuitive and easy-to-understand display indicating the number of game media possessed by the player and the game state. Further, the second value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent frequent switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image due to increase / decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

Also, 9 of the third invention is
A gaming apparatus (card unit 3 according to a fourth embodiment) described in any one of 1 to 7 of the third invention,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, medals),
The gaming device is:
Possessed game medium number counting means (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of possessed game media of a player who plays with the gaming machine;
When the number of possessed game media (the number of possessed balls, the number of possessed medals) counted by the possessed game media number counting means reaches a first value (first display threshold value), a predetermined image (dollar box, thousand box, Display control for causing the display means (display unit 340) to display stepwise display) and even if the number of possessed game media falls below the first value when the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, Predetermined number of times from the first value (difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: for example, 125 pachinko balls are paid out once, 50 medals are paid out once Alternatively, if the predetermined second value (first non-display threshold) is reached, the predetermined image is not hidden, and if the predetermined value is lower than the second value, the predetermined image is not displayed. Display control means (display control board 329) capable of executing non-display control for If a gaming device, characterized in that it further comprises a.
According to this, the number of game media possessed by a player who plays a game machine is counted by the possessed game media number counting means, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display means based on the counted number of possessed game media. Intuitive and easy-to-understand display indicating the number of game media possessed and the game state can be realized. Further, the second value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent frequent switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image due to increase / decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

Also, 10 of the third invention is
The gaming device according to 8 or 9 of the third invention,
When the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the display control means determines that the number of possessed game media has a predetermined trigger (for example, a single payout of a pachinko ball or medal, an enclosed pachinko machine 2B or The number by which the number of possessed game media is reduced to the number of game media possessed by one lending operation of game media in an enclosed slot machine (for example, 125 pachinko balls are paid out once, medal is paid out once) The predetermined number set based on the number of 50 sheets (the number of points deducted per time) (for example, 200 pachinko balls having 200 margins and 50 medals having 75 margins) In the gaming device, the non-display control is executed when the number of points deducted per time is less than the second value smaller than the first value. is there.
According to this, the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value can be optimized based on the number that the number of possessed game media decreases at a predetermined opportunity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

Moreover, 11 of 3rd invention is
A gaming device according to 9 of the third invention,
The game media is paid back to the player within the range of the number of possessed game media (game media is refunded by control of the card unit 3, game media is refunded by a nozzle, game in an enclosed pachinko machine 2B or an enclosed slot machine) Further including a refund control means (visitor card unit 380) for performing control for including a deduction based on a medium lending operation.
The possessed game medium number counting means has an accepted game medium number counting means (counter sensor of the visitor card unit 380) capable of counting the number of received game media, and the counting result of the received game medium number counting means and the refund The gaming device is characterized in that the number of possessed game media is updated based on the number of payouts by the control means.
According to this, by updating the number of possessed game media based on the count result of the accepted game media and the number of paid-out game media, it is possible to accurately count the number of possessed game media, and display / display a predetermined image. Non-display control can be performed accurately.

Moreover, 12 of 3rd invention is
A gaming apparatus according to any one of 8 to 11 of the third invention,
The display control means controls to update the display of the predetermined image stepwise according to the number of possessed game media (increase the number of dollar boxes, increase the ball bulk),
The display stage of the predetermined image displayed on the display means can be specified (update of the display counter value according to the display stage, a predetermined reference number of game media (for example, a first non-multiple value of the first display threshold value). Storage flag (RAM 330) for storing) setting display flag based on (number of display thresholds added);
And determining means (CPU 310) for determining the display stage of the predetermined image to be displayed on the display control means based on the display stage stored in the storage means and the number of possessed game media. This is a gaming device.
According to this, by storing the display stage of the predetermined image displayed on the display means in an identifiable manner, particularly when the predetermined number of game media is a number between the first value and the second value. It is possible to appropriately determine whether the predetermined image should be displayed or not displayed.

Moreover, 13 of 3rd invention is
A gaming apparatus according to any one of 8 to 12 of the third invention,
The display control means, when the number of possessed game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (step display of dollar box, thousand box, and ball bulk). Can be displayed, and a second display control for displaying a second predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new stepped display of a ball volume) different from the predetermined image on the display means can be executed. There is a gaming apparatus characterized by being.
According to this, since the second predetermined image can be newly displayed while the predetermined image is not displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of possessed game media, the display width can be further expanded.

14 of the third invention is
A gaming apparatus according to any one of 8 to 13 of the third invention,
The display control means, when the number of possessed game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) larger than the first value, the predetermined image (dollar box, thousands of boxes, ball bulk) on the display means. The second display for displaying on the display means a second predetermined image (special box, box, new ball display), which is different from the predetermined image. A gaming device characterized by being capable of executing control.
According to this, since the predetermined image can be continuously displayed and the second predetermined image can be newly displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of possessed game media, the display width can be further widened.

Also, 15 of the third invention is
A gaming apparatus according to 13 or 14 of the third invention,
When the second predetermined image is being displayed on the display means, the display control means has a second predetermined number of possessed game media numbers greater than the third value (a second display threshold and a second non-display). Difference from the threshold: For example, 125 balls that are paid out once for pachinko balls, 200 balls that give a certain margin to this, 50 balls that are paid out once for a medal, and a certain margin for this If the second predetermined image is not hidden if it has reached a small fourth value (second non-display threshold value), or 75 sheets that have been held, or if it falls below the fourth value, A gaming apparatus characterized by being capable of executing a second non-display control for making the second predetermined image non-displayable.
According to this, a second predetermined image can be newly displayed as the number of possessed game media increases. The fourth value for hiding the second predetermined image is smaller by a second predetermined number than the third value for displaying the second predetermined image. By providing the difference between the third value and the fourth value for the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the second predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold. be able to.

Also, 16 of the third invention is
A gaming device according to 15 of the third invention,
When the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, the display control means is configured such that the number of possessed game media is equal to the predetermined number of the first value (the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value). Difference: for example, 200 pachinko balls, 75 medals, or a predetermined first setting value) When the value is smaller than the second value, the non-display control is executed, and the display means When the predetermined image is displayed, the number of possessed game media is set to a value equal to the second predetermined number (the second display threshold value and the first value) set as a value larger than the difference between the first value and the second value. 2 Difference from non-display threshold: for example, 400 pachinko balls, 150 medals, or a predetermined second set value) when the second value is smaller than the second value, the second A gaming apparatus characterized by executing non-display control.
According to this, the second predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the third value and the fourth value is larger than the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value. For this reason, the second predetermined image can be made less likely to be hidden compared to the predetermined image.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game system 1A ... 3rd game system 1B ... 4th game system 1C ... 5th game system 2 ... Pachinko machine 2B ... Enclosed pachinko machine 3 ... Card unit 4 ... Data display device 5 ... Inter-unit counting Unit 6 ... Hall computer 7 ... Each counter 8 ... Mochitama management computer 9 ... Call lamp device
110 ... Pachinko machine 120 ... Card unit 124 ... (Touch panel type) Display 125 ... Card R / W
160 ... Hall computer 161 ... Balance management device 162 ... Member management device

Claims (5)

The number of game media obtained by a player through a game on a gaming machine and counted by the counting means of a gaming device provided in correspondence with the gaming machine can be used for gaming on the gaming machine and owned by the player Owning value management means for managing for each loan rate when the owning value is lent,
Conversion means for converting a first property value corresponding to one loan rate managed by the property value management means into a second property value corresponding to another loan rate;
A gaming system comprising:
A post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit that totalizes the types of gaming machines that have played a game after conversion by the conversion unit in an identifiable manner;
A gaming system characterized by further comprising a post-conversion gaming machine output means that outputs a type of a gaming machine that has played a game after conversion, which is specified based on a counting result by the post-conversion gaming machine counting means A gaming system according to claim 1,
The conversion means performs the conversion according to a conversion operation for a gaming device provided corresponding to the gaming machine,
Conversion receiving gaming machine counting means for tabulating so that the type of gaming machine corresponding to the gaming device that has received the converting operation can be specified;
Conversion reception gaming machine output means for outputting the type of gaming machine corresponding to the gaming device that has received the conversion operation specified based on the counting result by the conversion receiving gaming machine counting means, Game system to play. A gaming system according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
Conversion history totaling means for totalizing the history of conversions executed by the conversion means in an identifiable manner;
A gaming system, further comprising conversion history output means for outputting a conversion history specified based on the result of counting by the conversion history counting means. The number of game media obtained by a player through a game on a gaming machine and counted by the counting means of a gaming device provided in correspondence with the gaming machine can be used for gaming on the gaming machine and owned by the player Owning value management means for managing for each loan rate when the owning value is lent,
Conversion means for converting a first ownership value corresponding to one lending rate managed by the ownership value management means into a second ownership value corresponding to another lending rate, and corresponding to the gaming machine A management device capable of communicating with the gaming device provided;
A post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit that totalizes the types of gaming machines that have played a game after conversion by the conversion unit in an identifiable manner;
A management apparatus, further comprising: a post-conversion gaming machine output unit that outputs a type of a gaming machine that has played a game after the conversion, which is specified based on a totaling result by the post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit. The number of game media obtained by a player through a game on a gaming machine and counted by the counting means of a gaming device provided in correspondence with the gaming machine can be used for gaming on the gaming machine and owned by the player Owning value management means for managing for each loan rate when the owning value is lent,
A conversion means for converting a first possession value corresponding to one loan rate managed by the possession value management means into a second possession value corresponding to another loan rate, provided corresponding to a gaming machine; A management device capable of communicating with the gaming device.
A post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit that totalizes the types of gaming machines that have played a game after conversion by the conversion unit in an identifiable manner;
A management apparatus, further comprising: a post-conversion gaming machine output unit that outputs a type of a gaming machine that has played a game after the conversion, which is specified based on a totaling result by the post-conversion gaming machine totaling unit.